i
ii
iii
Copyright, 1923, by Eugene
Fersen
iv
v
vi
Let those who read this book understand
that its main object is to bring Enlightenment
to Humanity through Pure Knowledge
aflame with Love, and its mission is to
pave the way to Peace and Harmony and
Power.
Though a book of Science? it is a friend of
true Religions and Philosophies. They will
find their fundamental tenets scientifically
explained by the Science of Being, which
will also show them that they are all brothers,
because Truth is One, and is the Golden
Thread on which are strung the varied
pearls of Religions and Philosophies.
The day will come when Humanity will
have outgrown its present concepts of
Divinity, when Man will have lost his faith
in teachings based on Faith alone, the day
when utter despair will grip the heart of a
World which has lost its God. Humanity
will then discover through the Science this
book teaches that God has always lived with
men, yet they have not known Him.
vii
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction .
LESSON ONE-THE ABSOLUTE (SPIRIT) I
The Great Principle.....................5
The Pyramid of Life 15
The Five Statements of Being . . 29
The Three Attributes of Divinity . . 36
Trinity...............................38
Scientific Definition of Man . 47
Questions and Answers 48LESSON TWO-LIFE ENERGY (I)
Vibrations ...........................59
Use of the Magnetic Force in Modern
Concentration of the Magnetic Force
The Mental Contact....................62
The Star Exercise.....................64
Qualities of Universal Life Energy . 70
Causes of Physical Discomfort . . . 73
Human Emotions........................74
and Ancient Times...................77
in Inanimate Objects................78
Questions and Answers.................81
ix
LESSON THREE-
TILE RELATIVE (MATTER) 89
The Universe, the Worlds, and the
Indestructibility of Energy, Sub-
The Human Body and How to Sus-
The Material Body in its Last
The Origin of Matter . . 91
Aspects of Matter........................92
Scientific Definition of Matter . . 97
The Universe 100
The Law of Attraction...................101
Law of Attraction.....................102
stance, the Universe, and the Soul 106
Scientific Definition of the Soul . . . 108
Soul the Basis of Man's Existence . 111
Incarnation of Soul in Matter . . 115
tain It . .....................122
Analysis..............................125
Questions and Answers...................129LESSON FOUR- LIFE ENERGY (II) . 139
The Use of Universal Life Energy in
Healing by Use of Universal Life
Radio-activity..........................141
The Human Aura..........................141
Daily Life............................145
Energy................................147
Self-Treatment..........................151
Magnetic Chemicalization................152
Magnetic Sleep..........................153
Success and Prosperity..................156
x
Rejuvenation 157
Questions and Answers 165LESSON FIVE-
LAWS, ABSOLUTE AND RELATIVE 175
Laws of the Absolute..................177
The Law of Life and of Spirit 178
The Great Law.......................179
The Law of Vibration ...............182
Laws of the Relative ................183
The Law of Polarity.................183
The Law of Rhythm...................194
The Law of Gender ..................204
The Law of Cause and Effect 216
The Law of Love ......................224
The Law of Evolution..................229
Questions and Answers.................232LESSON SIX- MIND FORCE..................245
Mental Vibrations.....................248
The Telepathic Apparatus 248
The Concentrated Thought 251
The Self-Consciousness and the SubConsciousness.......................
254
Mental Laws...........................257
The Power of the Concentrated
Thought in Daily Life...............264
Mental Treatments.....................265
Mental Self-Protection................271
Mental Self-Treatments................272
xi
Treatments at a Distance.............273
Intuition............................277
Questions and Answers................280LESSON SEVEN--SPIRITUAL. POWER 293
The Way to Obtain Spiritual Power . 295
Theory of Spiritual Vibrations . . . 297
The Baptism by Fire..................303
The Two Roads........................304
The Origin of Evil...................306
The Legend-"The Dream" . . . 307
Questions and Answers................322
xii
Lesson One
1
2
GREAT question-the greatest
of all questions-has been
asked by Humanity for countless
ages, "Is there a God?"
From the point of view of
Religion, it is accepted on faith that there
is a God, a Divinity, Who is called the
Father of Man and of the Universe. But
human beings are not satisfied with believing
on faith; they want to know, to have irre-.
futable proofs of the existence of Divinity.
Therefore has it become the task of Science
to investigate the matter and find an answer
to this question, an answer which will
satisfy the searching of the rational mind;
and Science has solved the problem nobly.
3
Through scientific investigation, it
discovered that there is a Universal Force
which may be termed Eternal Energy-
Primal Energy-pervading the whole
Universe, filling Infinite Space.
If Primal Energy fills Infinite Space for
one moment, it becomes at that moment one
with Space; and if it is one with Space for
one moment, it must be one with Space for
Eternity, because there is no place where it
can lose itself. Therefore, by logical reasoning,
the Basic Energy of the Universe is
found to be Infinite, and at the same time
Eternal, has always been and always will be
so. Through further investigation, it was
discovered that Infinite Energy expresses
itself in most admirable laws, sublime
laws; that it shows the profoundest intelligence
and logic, a self-consciousness
expressed in the divinest terms; laws invariable,
true to themselves, mathematically
correct, and above all, harmonious
and beautiful.
As a result of all this reasoning, was discovered,
through Its first Universal Manifestation
as Primal Energy, That which has
always existed, the Eternal Unmanifest
called God, conscious of Its own power, law
emitting, law abiding and most Harmonious.
In other words, there is a Unit, a One,
existing eternally, expressing Itself through
Its Creation, the Universe, consciously
governing it, sustaining it in a condition of
Eternal Harmony, and loving it-for harmony
and Love are one. Harmony means
Attraction. Love IS Attraction.
Thus Science has discovered Divinity
under another name. Therefore for the
word "God," which would have been used in
Religion or Philosophy, will be substituted
a word having a deeper meaning, covering
broader ground ,-the word "Principle."
The word Principle is not related especially
to Divinity, but applies equally to every
science, logic, activity and art, as the principle
of music, the principle of mathematics,
4
etc. The word Principle gives a clearer idea
of the Great First Cause, of Divinity, than
does the word "God." The word itself cannot
be exhausted by its various definitions,
and if instead of a few definitions, we
should give ten thousand, the whole ground
would not have been covered. Yet there
are five words which characterize the word
"Principle" in general, including Principle as
applied to the Great First Cause (Divinity),
The Great Principle.
Scientific Definition of the Word
Principle
"PRINCIPLE IS THAT WHICH CREATES,
CONSTITUTES, GOVERNS, SUSTAINS AND
CONTAINS ALL." These five words include
all the various lesser definitions. What must
Principle do first? First it must CREATE,
because it cannot handle anything before it
has created the very thing it has to handle.
5
Thus the first activity of each principle, no
matter if it is the principle of music or of
mathematics or of anything else, must be
creation. The principle of music creates
notes, the principle of mathematics creates
numbers, etc.
But creation does not inevitably mean
order. It may be chaos. So that there
should be order, it must CONSTITUTE, that
is, assign to each phenomenon its proper
place which it will keep eternally. With
numbers, the activity of constitution demands
that one is made I, two is made 2,
three is made 3, etc. and each has its proper
place. Two can never lapse into three, or
three can never become four,-they are all
IMMUTABLE. It is only because they are
what they are, eternally, immutably, that
we can calculate at all mathematically. The
most complicated, intricate calculations are
possible only because each cipher has its
place assigned, constituted in order out of
chaos.
What is the next activity of Principle? It
must bring forth out of itself its lawschangeless
laws-by which it GOVERNS that
which it has created and that which it has
put in order, constituted. These laws are
then named. There are, for example, the
laws of mathematics. Through the application
of these laws we attain the invariable
result of our calculations. If we misapply
the laws we make mistakes. This applies
equally to music, to logic, etc.
6
But the acts of creation, constitution and
governing may be for but a moment. There
is nothing in these three activities which
ensures their continuance. After Principle
has created, constituted and governed, it
must SUSTAIN its very creation so as to
make it permanent, eternal.
And finally, if Principle creates everything
there is out of itself, it must then CON-
TAIN within itself all its creation. It must
be the father of its creation. It must be the
circumference, from within which springs all
creation; and since Principle from its own
center creates all and becomes its own circumference,
therefore, it is the center and
circumference of all. PRINCIPLE IS ALL.
So it is with the Great Principle, The
Great First Cause, Whom we call Divinity,
or God. FROM ETERNITY OUT OF ITSELF
THE GREAT PRINCIPLE CREATED THE
UNIVERSE, NCLUDING MAN AND EVERY-
THING ELSE IN THE UNIVERSE. FROM
ETERNITY IT ASSIGNED TO EACH CRE-
ATED THING ITS PROPER PLACE. Every
blade of grass has its place, every star knows
its course; and as long as all keep their places
and perform their duties, the Law of Order
in the Universe continues to operate. But if
they should slip from their places or fail in
their duties, there is chaos. The Law of
Order and Harmony is transgressed.
AFTER IT HAS ASSIGNED TO EVERY-
THING ITS PROPER IDENTITY, ITS IN-
DIVIDUALITY, IT ISSUES FROM ITSELF
7
THE UNIVERSAL, CHANGELESS LAWS,
WHICH THEN GOVERN THEM. Everything
down to the smallest electron is governed
by Its Laws-Laws as precise, as invariable,
as mathematical as the laws of mathematics
itself, for mathematics is part of Its Creation
and is therefore subject to Its Laws. Nothing
can be above or beyond these Laws, for
they are a manifestation of the Eternal
Activity of the Great Principle Itself.
THE FOURTH ACTIVIT OF THE GREAT
PRINCIPLE IS ITS POWER TO SUSTAIN. IT
POURS OUT ALL LIFE AND ENERGY FROM
ITSELF, AND SANCTIONS AND SUPPORTS
ITS OWN LIFE, INTELLIGENCE, LAWS AND
LOVE SO THAT THEY WILL EXIST WITH IT
ETERMALLY. From It proceeds all.
And lastly, as the mother-bird covers her
fledglings with her wing, so the Great
Principle enfolds all Creation within Its
boundless protection and Love. IT CON-
TAINS THE WHOLE UNIVERSE and therefore
may be said to be in a way greater than
Its own Creation. Yet It is identical with
Creation, for Creation is the exact counterpart
of the Great Principle, the Eternal
Unmanifest, of which we perceive but the
Manifestation. No one has seen the Great
Principle, the Unmanifest, at any lime. We
perceive and appreciate It only through Its
manifest Laws. THE UNIVERSE IS THE
MANIFASTATION AND SCIENTIFIC,
ACTUAL PROOF OF THE EXISTENCE OF
GREAT PRINCIPLE.
8
TO THIS PRESENT STATE OF HUMAN
CONSCIOUSNESS, THE GREAT PRINCIPLE
APPEARS IN FOUR DISTINCT ASPECTS-
LIFE
MIND
TRUTH
LOVE
They are in a certain scientific order;
they have been so eternally and cannot be
changed. It has been said, "God is first
Love." But one cannot love if one does not
already live, and even Divinity Itself cannot
reverse such a sequence. THE GREAT
PRINCIPLE IS FIRST LIFE. It must first
live and then It can think. It must first
live and then It can express Truth, Law. It
must first live and then It can love. THE
FIRST ASPECT OF THE GREAT PRINCIPLE,
THEREFORE, IS LIFE.
What comes next? MIND. For Life must
become conscious of itself, conscious of its
own existence. If it were not conscious of
itself, Life might be said not to exist completely;
but it is able to say, "I think, therefore
I am."
Next must come TRUTH, LAW. The Self
Conscious Life must be true to itself eternally,
law-emitting, law-abiding, since it can
only work harmoniously when it is true to
itself.
And finally, what must be last? It must
be LOVE-HARMONY. For if Life were not
capable of Love, of Harmony, it would be
set against itself, repelling instead of attract9
ing, self-hating and therefore self-destruc-
tive. Love and Harmony are synonymous
terms. LOVE IS THE LAW AND ALSO THE
FULLFLING OF THE LAW; it is Love alone
that sets the seal of Eternity on all; it is Love
alone that justifies Eternity and makes it
what it should be, a blessing. Without Love,
Eternity would be the most terrible hell
imaginable, for it is only when we know that
there will be Everlasting Harmony that we
can face Eternity. And the only guarantee
of Eternal Harmony lies in the fact that The
Great Principle Itself must love eternally, in
order to maintain throughout Eternity Its
Own Existence. That is why we cling to
Love to the very last, when all else, Life and
Mind and even Truth, have apparently
failed us. LOVE IS NOT FIRST IN ORDER
BUT IN IMPORTANCE. Whatever else may
be achieved will be of no use without Love,
for it is the beauty and radiance and joy of
the Universe.
These are the Pour Aspects of the Great
Principle. They are instantaneous and simultaneous,
yet expressed in their logical order.
This order cannot be changed; it is fundamental
and scientific. Those Four Aspects of
the Great Principle, as manifested in our
lives, may be regarded as the four corners of
a perfect square, and their mutual relations
analyzed from a scientific point of view.
Let us take the upper left corner, Life.
What does Life face, if we pass a line across
the square diagonally? We find Life facing
10
Truth. What does this mean? It means
that THE FIRST ETERNAL DUTY OF LIFE
IS TO BE LIVED, that it must be true to
itself. For if Life is not expressed through
activity there is no hope possible for it. In
order that there should be continued activity,
energy manifested (thus making all else
possible) Life must be true to its own mission,
TO LIVE; for this reason it faces Truth.
What has Life on its right side? It has
Mind. The right side is always considered
the dominant side, because it stands for the
right. Therefore Life has Mind on its right
side. This implies that LIFE MUST BE CON-
SCIOUS OF ITS OWN EXISTENCE, of its own
operations, of its own duties, for if it were
not self-conscious, it could not achieve all
that it should achieve.
Upon the left side, Life has Love. This
11
means that Life must not only be constantly
active, conscious of itself and its activities,
but that in order to be eternal, IT MUST
ALSO BE A LOVING AND HARMONIOUS
LIFE. It is the left side which is the side of
the heart, the organ, the symbol of Love.
We come now to the lower left corner of
the square, Mind, and draw a line across the
square diagonally. What does Mind face?
It faces Love. This means that the Mind's
eternal duty is to be expressed first in Love;
it must interpret Harmony, for without this
nothing would be good in its work. Therefore,
Mind must always face Love. THIS IS
THE GREAT LESSON THAT MIND HAS TO
LEARN, THE LESSON OF LOVE.
What has Mind on its right side? It has
Truth. This means that it must demonstrate
Truth, because Mind had once perverted
Truth in his own nature. It is said of Satan
that he was a liar from the beginning; and
yet Satan is Lucifer, is Mind. Therefore,
THE NEXT LESSON THAT MIND MUST
LEARN IS TO BE TRUE. Truth implies Law
-a constant reminder to Mind to bee lawabiding,
for it was Mind also that first
violated the Law.
And upon the left side, Mind has Life.
It must express activity--MIND MUST BE
OPERATING, THINKING. As that is a
natural function for Mind, it becomes a
secondary duty; hence Mind has Life on its
left side.
At the third corner of the square stands
Truth. What does Truth face? It faces
Life, for TRUTH MUST FIRST BE LIVED.
Truth which is not lived is not Truth. For
that reason, the first thing that Truth has
always to face is its own expression, its
manifestation.
Law, the corollary of Truth, must be
demonstrated, put into operation. The
Laws of the Universe must be eternal
and voicing themselves eternally, or the
Universe would sink into chaos.
12
And what stands upon the right side of
Truth as its dominant power? Love. FOR
TRUTH, LAW, MUST PROVE ITSELF TO BE
ARDENT, COMPASSIONATE, TENDER, a
Law of harmony and beauty. It must be
radiant and great-hearted, not the cold, dry
truth of the intellect. It is the burning
Truth of Love.
On the left side of Truth stands Mind. It
signifies that Truth must be expressed consciously;
the Law must be intelligently
formulated; but those functions being natural
to Truth, Mind is placed on the left side of it.
And finally to the fourth activity of The
Great Principle. What does Love face?
Love faces Mind. Love manifests itself last,
but is the most sublime of the Pour Aspects.
IT IS A POWER SO GREAT, A GIFT SO PRE-
CIOUS, THAT IT MUST NEVER BE WASTED
OR MISUSED. IT MUST BE USED INTELLI-
GENTLY; FOR THAT REASON IT FACES
MIND OR THE CAPACITY OF DISCRIMINA-
TION. Jesus said: "Cast not your pearls
13
before swine." Do not squander Love, the
precious gift, on those who do not understand
it. Jesus knew these Laws, and the relation
of these Aspects of the Great Principle
to each other; therefore he warns us to be
careful not to throw away this most wonderful
treasure. SO LOVE MUST FIRST FACE MIND.
What has Love upon its right side? It has
Life. This means that Love must be continually
expressed in activity, IF WE DO
JIOT LIVE LOVE, THEN WE DO NOT LOVE.
At its left side is Truth. Love must be
true to itself. But Love IS always true to
itself. Truth, Law, is a very secondary
power for Love, because by its own harmonious
nature it is always law-abiding,
always true to itself.
The Two greatest powers in the World,
Love and Mind, are facing each other in the
Square. They are the two manifestations, the
first dual emanations of the great Principle,
of Divinity, - Christ and Lucifer. Love
expresses Christ; Mind expresses Lucifer.
Satan was once called Lucifer, The Carrier of
Eternal Light; his Eternal Mate was Christ,
the Anointed One. But Mind in his pride
had fallen, AND CHRIST, LOVE, TO SAVE
THE WORLD, ASSUMED THE ACTIVITIES
WHICH HAD BELONGED TO LUCIFER AND
BECAME BOTH IDEAL LOVE AND PERFECT
MIND. Originally it was not so, and finally
it will also not be so. There will come an
adjustment, and the two counterparts will
be re-united and become equal again.
14
Mind comes to us and leads us to Perfection,
yet it cannot enter with us through the
door of Perfection, of Heaven, for it is an
exile from Heaven. For the time being it is
shut out; and because it is seemingly separated
from the Infinite Principle, it cannot
grasp Infinity. It is only through Intuition
and through emotion, especially of the higher
self, that we can become One with the Great
Principle, and rise into the highest vibrations,
into the Infinite All. Mind can not
bring us there. It is Love, the Christ in our
nature, that part of us which has never
fallen and which has remained perfect
eternally, which ALONE CAN LEAD US
BACK TO INFINITY. It is therefore our
duty to work out of the limitations imposed
on us by Mind, the Lucifer principle in us,
and to ATTUNE MIND TO THE CHRIST
PRINCIPLE IN US; this redemption will
unite again these two apparently diverse
principles in Eternal Harmony.
Now if equal lines are drawn from the four
corners of the square upwards to a common
point, the figure produced will be a pyramid.
And if we work harmoniously and simultaneously
from the four corners, Life, Mind,
Truth, and Love, and extend these to one
point, that point will symbolize SPIRIT, the
Absolute, the All-inclusive Principle from
which everything proceeds and to which it
finally returns. The ancient Pyramid of the
Egyptians, built so many centuries ago,
meant this very thing. It meant Divinity
15
working from the four-square of Humanity,
through Life, Mind, Truth and Love to Its
own apex, Spirit.
Geometrically it would be impossible to
construct a perfect pyramid unless each side
were equal to the others; the apex would
never be reached if even one side failed in its
proportions. So it is just as impossible from
the point of view of the Absolute Law to
reach Spirit, if any one of the Aspects of the
Great Principle in us is at fault. THE FOUR
SIDES MUST BE HARMONIOUSLY EQUAL;
none must fail or dominate the others. We
should not concern ourselves too much about
reaching the apex, Spirit, if only we work
conscientiously at harmonizing the four
sides, for the Law itself will lock after the
results of our work.
We are building up the ground under ourelves
in working out these four Aspects of
he Great Principle, for EVERY TIME THAT
WE PERFORM AN ACTION ENERGETIC-
ALLY, INTELLIGENTLY, ACCURATELY,
AND LOVINGLY WE HAVE PLACED BE-
NEATH OUR FEET A STRATUM THAT
16
EXTENDS TO THE FOUR ANGLES OF OUR
SQUARE. Thus we have risen by this much,
and gradually, using every activity performed
with energy, intelligence, accuracy
and love, as a step upwards, we shall rise
nearer and nearer to that point which is
Spirit, and which is the final goal of all human
endeavor. When we reach Spirit we do
not ourselves know how we reached It. Nor
do we need to know, for it works according
to Law, and all we must do is to LET THE
LAW WORK FOR US AND NOT CONCERN
OURSELVES WITH THE FRUITS OF OUR
ACTIONS. If the work is good, the result
will be good, according to the law of Cause
and Effect. It is all so simple, and yet
human beings so little understand it and
wonder why their progress is stopped. Some
one says, "I am so loving, so generous, I am
willing to give everything. Why can I not
rise?" Perhaps one of his qualities is not
developed, one of the corners of his pyramid
not properly built.
The problem is to find out which one of the
corners is underdeveloped. Let us take, for
instance, any one of the little daily actions
which all of us have continually to perform
in our lives not something which we
especially like to do, but just an ordinary
action which has more the character of a
duty than of pleasure-and let us analyze
how we perform that action. If we do it
energetically, the Life corner is strongly
built. If we do it intelligently, the Mind
17
corner is properly represented. If we do it
accurately, the corner of Truth (Law) is also
well balanced. And if we do it lovingly, the
Love corner is then in harmony with the
other three corners. But if we discover in
the actions we analyze that some of those
four qualities are too weak in comparison
with the strong, all we have to do is to
reinforce the weak characteristics in order
that they should strike a proper balance with
the strong. NOW BY ONE OF THOSE ORDI-
NARY ACTIONS OF OURS WE CAN FIND
OUT THE WHOLE OF OUR CHARACTER, just
as by analyzing a drop of water taken from a
pool we are able to discover all the qualities
of the water of the whole pool. In correcting
the weak sides in those little daily actions of
ours, we will by and by improve our whole
character and make it harmonious, thus
properly building up our Life Pyramid. This
will secure us a speedy progress in our individual
evolution.
THE POINT IS THE CONSUMMATION OF
PERFECT HARMONY FROM ALL SIDES.
From these four basic corners, from the socalled
human square, we rise to the Divine
Point. If we look down from above, we
find the Four Aspects, the Manifestation
below; and if we look up from the Four we
behold the one Point, Unity,. the Great
Principle, the Unmanifest, Spirit.
And thus we have also the correlation of
numbers; we have the number four of our
human square and the number three of the
18
Divine triangle represented in the side of
the pyramid, four added to three making
seven, a number of completeness. Besides
that, by multiplying four and three, we have
twelve, again a number of completeness, but
manifesting it under a different aspect.
Seven and twelve play a very important role
in our present stage of Evolution.
When we realize these Aspects of the
Great Principle, our duty is naturally to
manifest them in our lives, to live the Four
Aspects. What does it mean TO LIVE LIFE?
Of course we are all living. To live Life
means much more than that. IT MEANS TO
DO ALWAYS ONE'S DUTY AT THE RIGHT
TIME. Now most human beings do not at
all do their duty at the right time. They
have no idea of the necessity of doing it at
the right time. Imagine an orchestra playing;
the duty of each musician, according to
the laws of orchestration, is to sound his
notes, to play his passage, at a certain time;
and if he and his fellow musicians do it
properly, we have beautiful and harmonious
music. But if each musician were to play
his notes a little earlier or a little later, what
would happen? There would be discord. In
a way man cannot play false, because all
notes are true notes; but man can play false
when he plays the right notes at the wrong
time. This is the very thing we do when we
individuals fail in our duties. We either do
the right thing at the wrong moment, or
else when the right moment comes we forget
19
our obligations. The result for us is discord.
The discord which we create, in this way
the most detrimental, because if our action
are maladjusted and ill-timed, we start new
causes which will have their results at a given
time; and if the causes are started at the
wrong time the effets also will come at the
wrong time. Either way we plant the seeds
of disharmony, and for that vary reason so
often we do not seem adjusted to our lives,
and find that things continually happen to
us in a disharmonious way. Our days are
made up of a number of small events, some of
which are seemingly important, some of no
importance; but there is usually something
that does not work properly, and the cause
of it is an action hidden in the past. We had
not performed our duty at the right time.
We must always see if there is an obligation
to meet, and we must not fail in it. If there
is a greater duty to perform and a smaller
one to perform, and we see that there is
some one who is able to perform the smaller
duty in our place, we are justified in leaving
it and taking up the greater. But if there is
no one to perform the smaller duty and the
smaller was the first to appear, we must
accomplish that one first; for after all it is
nothing but a human concept of smallness or
greatness. Everything is great in a wayand
everything is small in a way. In a
symphony one note is not more important
than another note. They are all equally
important. The most delicate note is just
20
as important as the deepest sounding one,
because each has its proper place. Therefore,
we must not forget that Life is just as scientific
as the music of an orchestra, and that
if we want to live our lives harmoniously,
we must play our part as conscientiously as
we would in an orchestra. Life is one great
orchestra. That is what is meant by living
Life, TO DO ONE'S DUTY ALWAYS AT THE
PROPER TIME AND NEVER TO WORRY
ABOUT THE RESULT. THE RESULT WILL
COME RIGHT INEVITABLY IF WE ACT
RIGHTLY. There is a Law that will show the
way. When we shall know the Law, we
will move through our lives in serenity.
Now what does it mean TO LIVE LIFE
CONSCIOUSLY, INTELLIGENTLY-to demonstrate
Mind in our Life? Of course we
are all thinking people; some of us are
people of much knowledge, of great intellect;
and yet to demonstrate Intelligence, Mind,
in our lives means more than that. It means
that WE SHOULD ALWAYS JUDGE RIGHT-
LY, ALWAYS KEEP TO THE MAIN ISSUES,
ALWAYS TAKE THE ESSENTIAL AND GIVE
TO THE NON-ESSENTIAL ITS PROPER
PLACE. Above all, it means that WE
SHOULD NOT LOSE OURSELVES IN DE-
TAILS, that we should retain a proper mental
perspective, because to lose oneself in details
is one of the besetting sins of Humanity. If
we wish to analyze a tree, and come so near
to it that we can see only the leaves, we will
find that we have no right impression of the
21
tree as a whole. The study of a leaf will
not reveal the character of the tree. We
must stand at some distance in order to see
the complete tree; then only is it possible to
say, "There is the trunk, these are the
branches, and these are the leaves." That
is what we should do, and that is what so
few of us do in life. We are usually losing
ourselves in details, and giving to nonessentials
a more important role than to
essentials. TO LIVE INTELLIGENTLY
MEANS TO GIVE TO EACH PERSON AND TO
EACH THING THEIR PROPER PLACE, to
keep one's judgment clear and to try to judge
as impartially as possible. In other words,
TO SIMPLIFY THINGS AND NOT COMPLI-
CATE THEM. The complexity of life in
every direction is one of the greatest failings
of the world, especially of our modern
civilization. The Great Principle is the One
Point. There is nothing more simple than a
point. At the same time the Great Principle
is a Sphere. There is nothing more perfect,
complete, and at the same time more simple
than a sphere. It is perfection in absolute
simplicity.
Now what does it mean TO LIVE TRUTH?
We are taught to be truthful, and we realize
the offense of a deliberate lie. Yet to live
Truth is more than that. It signifies that
WE SHOULD MEAN ALWAYS WHAT WE
SAY. Most of us human beings do not mean
at all in our conversation what we say. We
usually say one thing and mean another
22
entirely different. We say, "I love you so
much that I would die for you!" How many
of us really mean this? With most it is
only a manner of talking. We live in such
an age of exaggeration, that when we come
in contact with people who tell the truth, we
do not always believe it. We have grown
accustomed to discount the truth. People
do not realize consciously the tremendous
value of having the word correspond to the
thought. In a certain passage of the Sacred
Book called the Bible, a chapter begins: "In
the beginning was the Word and the Word
was with God and the Word was God."
What does it mean? IN THE BEGINNING
EXISTED THE VIRTUE OF OMNIPOTENCE,
THE POWER TO MANIFEST, TO EXPRESS
ITSELF, AND IT WAS WITH THE GREAT
PRINCIPLE AND IT WAS THAT GREAT
PRINCIPLE. Therefore is the word so tremendously
powerful. A WORD SHOULD BE
A CREATION, SHOULD BE LAW. How have
we human beings used the word? As so
many dead leaves, as so much worthless
sound, as of no value. And this is a great
loss for us because we are squandering one of
the greatest powers in the Universe, the
power of Truth. Therefore TO LIVE TRUTH
IS ALWAYS TO MEAN WHAT WE SAY. When
we say it is day, we must mean it is day, and
when we say it is night, we must mean night;
and if for some reason we feel that we cannot
tell the truth, it is better not to say anything
than to tell a lie, because of THE DISCON23
NECTION BETWEEN THE THOUGHT AND
THE WORD. For thus both thought and
word are rendered powerless. The law says
that the effect must correspond to the cause.
Therefore, in disconnecting the two, we
are violating one of the fundamental Laws,
the Law of the Great Principle, a Law so
potent in our hands. THERE IS NO COM-
PROMISE WITH THE ABSOLUTE.
There is yet another point. We often tell
untruths in jest. We do not mean it. We
know it is an untruth and it is meant to be
an untruth. We very often make fun of
people and things without really meaning to
be unkind or wishing to do harm. But there
is a law which states that RIDICULE KILLS.
IF WE MAKE FUN OF SOMETHING, WE
KILL IN THE INDIVIDUAL.. THE SENSE OF
THAT SOMETHING. If it is a good thing,
something emanating from the Source of
Perfection, it cannot be killed; hut we can
destroy in an individual his sense of that
thing, which is the same as killing it in him.
There is an orator who makes a speech full
of intelligence and sincerity, and who impresses
his audience with the power and
beauty of his words. The opposing party can
most easily destroy the effect of his speech by
ridicule. A better or more noble speech
would not as easily destroy it, but a few
frivolous words of derision would make a
burlesque of his speech, would make his
audience laugh, and in that moment would
destroy their sense of the value of the speech.
24
Many know this power and use it. Many
use the power and do not know it. It is important,
therefore, to know that we can
destroy whatever we want by ridicule, by
laughing at it, but we must be careful that it
is not something good, or sacred to us.
Ridicule and laughter are like a two-edged
sword-they destroy in both directions. If
we have something which is sacred to us and
which we would keep sacred for ourselves,
we should never let anyone make fun of it,
because in ourselves it will be destroyed. It
is the operation of the law. Nature has
given us the gift of laughter to neutralize
negative impressions? because there is so
much disharmony around us, that if we did
not have that gift we would be absolutely
overwhelmed by disharmony. That is why,
when we see something inharmonious, we
laugh at it. If we were to take it seriously it
would not be destroyed and would harm us;
and as we do not want that, as we want only
Harmony real to us, we laugh at disharmony
and thus destroy our sense of it. And that is
why we have theatres and other places where
people can go and laugh and amuse themselves;
because this life is so strenuous that it
would require a great deal of mental effort to
throw off the disharmony from the mind.
There is the easier way--we go and laugh it
away. It seems that if we see something
funny we relieve ourselves of the burden.
This gift which Nature has given us let us
remember to be very careful in using.
25
Last comes LOVE--TO LIVE LOVE, TO
MANIFEST LOVE IN OUR LIVES. What does
that mean? To love is natural to us because
it is a basic Law of Nature. There is no one
on Earth who does not love somebody or at
least something. There is the miser; he loves
gold. He is supposed to be one of the most
despicable of beings, yet he loves; only he
loves a metal. It is a precious metal, a noble
metal, and he therefore loves it. Some day
he may love an animal, a still higher concept
of Love; and finally he will love a human
being; and again there are the various grades
of human beings for him to love, always raising
him higher and higher. Even the man
who goes and steals something, who goes and
kills somebody, why does he do it? Out of
love for something. He wants to get that
which is dear to him. That is a mis-applica-
tion of Love, for the perversion of which he
will some day pay the penalty, but still it has
Love latent in it. Therefore, wherever we
go we shall never fail to find people loving
something or somebody. But to love completely,
to demonstrate Love in our lives, is
much more than that. It means that WE
SHOULD ALWAYS TRY TO FEEL LOVING TO
OUR FELLOW MEN, TO EXPRESS OUR
LOVE-NATURE EVERY INSTANT AS MUCH
AS WE CAN.
"GIVE TO THE STRANGER THE RICH-
NESS OF THY SMILE" is the gentle appeal of
Love. What does it mean? It means that
we should give even to the stranger, whom
26
we do not know, expressions of love. We all
try to do our measure of good for our fellow
beings, yet very often, in little things and
things dear to the human heart, we omit
gentleness, a smile. It is not the thing itself
which counts, but the way the thing is done
or the way it is given. One can give a little,
simple gift with so much love in the way of
giving that it will appear to be like the greatest
treasure; and one can give away with the
stroke of the pen a whole fortune, and people
would take it because it is a fortune but would
not feel the preciousness in it; for it is the
motive which counts, the Love in the action.
"NO MATTER WHAT YOU DO, IF THERE IS
NO LOVE IN YOUR HEART TO SUPPORT IT,
ALL YOUR SACRIFICE IS IN VAIN," is a
wonderful and scientific statement found in
the Bible. We may give to the needy the
most valuable gifts, yet if there is no Love in
what we do, all that is in vain. Love is that
which, because of its constructive power,
makes every service so precious; and that is
why, especially in these days, we should
always try to express the kindness we may
feel to people. It is a very important thing
that we should not keep Love unmanifested,
but should at every opportunity disclose it,
show it forth, manifest it, be it in a word,
in a smile, in a look or in a handshake.
"When he or she looks at you, you feel as if
you have received a precious gift," is a very
beautiful saying among the peasants in
Russia. It means that one feels enriched by
27
the simple look of an individual, regardless
of whether it is a man or a woman, for sex
does not make any difference; but the mere
Love, the richness of the look, makes one
feel as if one had received something worth a
great deal. That shows how valuable Love
is. All things can be bought; LOVE IS THE
ONE THING WHICH CAN NEVER BE
BOUGHT. That is why it is really precious
and that is why we should never be ungenerous
with it, because there is always enough for us
to give. In fact, the more we give, the
more there is to be given. Now that does
not at all contradict what was said before in
explaining the quadrangle, where Love faces
Mind. ONE SHOULD NOT SQUANDER LOVE
AS A SPECIAL GIFT ON THOSE WHO ARE
NOT WORTHY BUT SHOULD RADIATE LOVE
AS A GENERAL GIFT TO ENEMIES AS TO
FRIENDS, ALIKE TO ALL, JUST AS THE SUN
SHINES ON THE WICKED AS ON THE GOOD,
ON THE PLOWER AS ON THE WEED, ALL
THINGS RECEIVING THE SUN'S RAYS
EQUALLY, EVEN IF THEY DO NOT MAKE
EQUAL USE OF THEM.
28
THE FIVE STATEMENTS
OF BEING
THE SUM OF ALL LIVES THE ONE LIFE, IS
THE GREAT PRINCIPLE. THE ABSOLUTE,
CALLED GOD.
THE SUM OF ALL INTELLIGENCES, THE
ONE INTELLIGENCE, IS THE GREAT
PRINCIPLE, THE ABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD.
'I'HE SUM OF ALL TRUTHS, THE ONE
'I'RUTH , IS THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THE
ABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD.
THE SUM OF ALL LOVES, THE ONE
LOVE, IS THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THE
ABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD.
THE SUM OF ALL BEINGS, THE ONE
BEING, IS THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THE
ABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD.
These five scientific statements correspond
to the five activities as expressed in the
word "Principle." The first, to the activity
of creating; the second, to the activity of
constituting; the third, to the activity of
governing; the fourth, to the activity of
sustaining; and the fifth, to the activity of
containing. They also correspond in the
square to the four corners and the point,--
Life, the Sum of all lives; Mind, the Sum of
all intelligences; Truth, the Sum of all truths;
Love, the Sum of all loves; and Spirit, the
Sum of all beings.
What do they stand for? THE SUM OF
ALL LIVES, THE ONE LIFE, IS THE GREAT
29
PRINCIPLE, THE ABSOULUTE, CALLED GOD
- means that all individual lives (no matter
if it is the life of a minute cell in the body, of
a microbe, of an electron, or the life of a
star, of a planet, of an individual, or any
life in this Universe, lives small and great)
all are bound together, are holding together
as One Great Whole, like the drops of water
holding together and forming the ocean.
All these lives are One Great Life, as all the
drops of water are one ocean, and that is the
Absolute; and whenever we realize that we
are a part of that One Life, we have then all
the benefit of all the Forces and the Eternity
of the One Life. But whenever we feel
separate from that Life, then we lose our
strength, and are at the mercy of circumstances,
of fate; just as a little drop of water
which is thrown out of the ocean and lies
there alone on the sand, disappears because
it is a separate unit, but which, when it is
one with the ocean, has all the power of the
ocean to sustain it. So it is with us. When
we realize that we are one with that Great
Life, one with the ABSOLUTE. the Great
Principle, then we are strong, then we are
what WE REALLY ARE; but if we think we
are separate, we are weak, because we are
left alone. That is so, not because we have
been told that it is so, but because it is a
Law; and when analyzed by Science, those
lives taken together are found to be really
ONE UNIVERSAL, ETERNAL LIFE.
30
What does it mean, THE SUM OF ALL
INTELLIGENCES, THE ONE INTELLI-
GENCE, IS THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THE
ABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD? It means that
all intelligences throughout the whole
Universe, all thoughts, the creative intellect
of the genius, and the little mentality of a
cell in the body, that has only enough sense
to do its proper duty so as to work for us automatically,
taking all of them as One Great
Whole, make THAT ONE INTELLIGENCE
WHICH WE GALL COSMIC MIND, THE
SELF-CONCIOUSNESS OF THE UNIVERSE.
And whenever we feel one with that
Cosmic Mind, we can draw all the knowledge
there is from that Consciousness, and
we Know; we can know all without studying,
without the process even of reasoning. We
do not need to go from one point to another,
for we are then comprehensive and include
all points. We have the Whole before us and
we are a part of the Whole. Again like a
drop, one with the ocean it is strong, outside
it is weak. It is not because we like it
or believe it to be so, but because IT IS THE
LAW. ALL IS ONE INTELLIGENCE AND WE
ARE PART OF IT.
THE SUM OF ALL TRUTHS, THE ONE
'I'RUTH, IS THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THE
ABSOLUTE, CALLED COD. That means
that everything which REALLY IS from
Eternity unto Eternity, every Law, no
matter if it is a little law or if it is a Universal
31
Law, every Truth ever thought or spoken,
make ONE GREAT ALL, ONE UNIVERSAL
TRUTH-AND WE ARE PART OF IT. Whenever
then we realize that ONE-NESS with the
Great Truth and stand for that Truth and
live It, we have the whole of the Truth of
the Universe back of us, because we are
part of It, as a drop is part of the Ocean.
The drop may be on the top of the wave; it
is not the force of the drop which makes it
rise, it is the force of the wave, and the wave
is a part of the ocean. So are we. When we
stand for Truth we know that we are one
with the Great Truth. We have then
irresistible and invincible Power with us
because the Great Principle----God----is that
One Truth.
THE SUM OF ALL LOVES, THE ONE
LOVE, IS THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THE
ABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD. What does it
mean? It means every affection, every
fervent emotion, every loving thought,
word, look or deed-all these loves, be it the
love which makes worlds vibrate, or the
little unconscious love of two chemicals, put
in the presence of one another and combining
because they are mutually attracted loves
small and great, conscious or unconscious,
sublime or low, taken together into One
Great Whole, make THE ONE INFINITE,
UNIVERSAL LOVE FOR WHICH NOTHING
IS TOO GREAT. Whenever we love unselfishly,
not from our own personal little self, but
32
from the Great Self, then that Ocean of
Infinite Power and Harmony is immediately
behind us in its GREATEST, MOST BEAUTI-
FUL MANIFESTATION OF LOVE-the manifestation
which is last and yet is first because
it is the most important, and because it is
THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THE ABSOLUTE.
Therefore, whenever we love unselfishly and
manifest that Love, the whole of the
Universe's Love stands behind us, and
THERE IS NO GREATER POWER ON EARTH
OR IN HEAVEN THAN THAT.
And finally, THE SUM ALL BEINGS,
THE ONE BEING IS THE GREAT
PRINCIPLE, THE ABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD.
What does that mean? It means that all
the individual beings, whether worlds, stars,
planets, human beings, animals, plants,
minerals, cells, atoms, electrons-the smallest
things everywhere and the biggest
things make ONE, ARE ONE INFINITE,
UNIVERSAL BEING, THE BODY OF WHICH
IS THE UNIVERSE, THE MIND COSMIC
INTELLIGENCE, AND THE SOUL INFINITE
LOVE.
Taken all together with their bodies,
minds, and souls, holding together through
the indissoluble Force of Attraction, yet
retaining their eternal identities, moving
freely in their own individual orbits, attracted
one to another by the Law of Attraction,
working throughout the Universe, THEY
CONSTITUTE ONE GREAT BEING, just as
each cell of our body, attracted to other
33
cells, form this very body of ours. The body
is made up of minute individual cells and
yet it is a complete whole, which is strong
and has its own powers. So it is with that
One Great Being. It is made up of all of us;
we are an eternal part of it; and THAT BEING
IS CALLED THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THE
ABSOLUTE, OR GOD.
Now the question may be asked, why are
there five words which scientifically define
the word "Principle," and not six or four or
seven? Why does the Great Principle express
itself in the four aspects of Life, Mind,
Truth, and Love, culminating in the fifth
aspect, Spirit? Why are there five Statements
of Being, and not a lesser or greater
number? Because we are living now in the
Fifth Period of Humanity's evolution,
represented allegorically in the Bible as the
Fifth Day of Creation. The evolutionary
number of this age being FIVE, that number
is now continually expressed throughout the
material and mental planes. That is why
we have five senses, five extremities, five
fingers, etc. The present human race (the
Fifth Race) embraces five distinct types, the
white, yellow, red, brown and black. This
planet itself is geographically divided into
five major parts. The Pentagram, or five
pointed star, is the emblem of the Humanity
of today. Instances of this sort can be cited
indefinitely. Even human inventions express
continually the number Five, or the Fifth
Day of Creation. We read in the Bible that
34
on the fifth day were created great whales,
fish, birds, and all creeping things. What
has the human mind brought forth today as
mechanical inventions? Our gigantic steamers
correspond to great whales, our submarines
to fish, our airships and airplanes to
birds, our trains, automobiles, etc., to
creeping things. The inventive genius of
Humanity bears the seal of the Fifth Period
of our evolution. Most human beings of this
age are, in mental or emotional development,
creeping things, or at their best only
birds. In our present state of consciousness
we cannot even imagine the transcendent
power, intelligence, and glory which will be
ours when Humanity will reach the end of the
Sixth Period of Evolution, that Sixth Day
of Creation, when, according to Biblical
allegory, Divinity created Man in Its own
Image and Likeness, and gave him dominion
over all. When Man, through self knowledge
and development of his inner latent
qualities and powers, will be revealed to
himself as he really is, the Son of God, the
Witness of the Absolute, the Perfect Manifestation
of the Great All, he will reach a
greatness which passes all understanding.
And this task of self development is the
IMMEDIATE AND MOST IMPORTANT PROB-
LEM OF HUMANITY.
35
THE THREE ATTRIBUTES
OF THE ABSOLUTE ARE:
OMNIPRESENCE, OMNISCIENCE,
OMNIPOTENCE.
Theological teachings state that Divinity
has three distinct attributes, Omnipresence,
Omniscience and Omnipotence. That is, the
Great Principle, the Absolute, is omnipresent,
omniscient and omnipotent.
What is Omnipresence? The Great
Principle has from Eternity, out of Itself,cre-
ated everything there is. It is Its Own Center
and Its Own Circumference. The Absolute,
the Great All, is present everywhere,
whether we are conscious of It or not. That
means that whenever we wish to come in
contact with the Great Principle, we do not
need to think about something far distant,
unattainable. All we need to do is TO KNOW
THE IMMUTABLE FACT that Its first manifestation,
Universal Energy, is always about
us in its full power. It is closer to us than
our own skin, which is in fact a part of it.
Therefore, when anyone realizes that Presence
consciously, THERE IT IS IN ITS FIJLL
POWER. We again can make the comparison
with the ocean. We cannot say that in any
one place in the ocean there is more power
than in another. There is power everywhere.
Whenever one wishes to contact the
qualities and powers of the ocean, one has
simply to dip the hand into the water and one
will feel all that the ocean is; and if one puts
the hand in another part of the ocean, one
will have the same result. Millions of people
can do the same thing, at the same time, in
millions of different places, and they all will
contact the same fullness of the ocean. So it
is with the Great Principle. Whenever we
consciously contact the Absolute in Its manifestation
as Universal Energy, THERE IT IS
IN ALL ITS OMNIPOTENCE because It is all
embracing. Therefore, it is not correct, as
we very often find in literature, to imagine
36
that there is somewhere in the Universe a
Center of Powers and Forces from which all
Forces radiate, acting most strongly upon
those things which are nearest, and more
feebly upon those farthest away. WE CAN
ALWAYS RECEIVE EVERYTHING HERE
AND NOW, ONLY WE MUST BECOME CON-
SCIOUS OF IT. It is our own unbelief, our
fear, which prevents the Law from manifesting
it. There are ways to overcome these
unbeliefs, these fears, and they will be
shown and explained in the following lessons.
As the Great Principle is all-inclusive, It
contains naturally all essentials of knowledge.
Therefore, whenever we contact It in Its
Aspect of Universal Energy we at the same
time come in touch also with Its Aspect of
Cosmic Mind, thus receiving all knowledge,
all wisdom, because, as the Absolute embraces
in Itself all there is, all knowledge
which is in It must be there for us to contact,
and thus to receive.
The natural result of Omniscience is
Omnipotence, because WHEN WE KNOW,
37
WE CAN. We usually cannot do things only
because we do not know how. Knowledge
gives us the possibility to achieve; and since,
therefore, Omnipotence is the direct result of
Omniscience, whenever we contact Omniscience,
logically, we inevitably achieve
Omnipotence. That means, through THE
REALIZATION OF THE ABSOLUTE HERE
NEAR US, CLOSE AT HAND, WE IDENTIFY
OURSELVES WITH ALL ITS POWERS. There
is nothing closer to us than the Great
Principle, because out of Its Own Self has It
created us and IN IT WE LIVE, MOVE AND
HAVE OUR BEING. It is within us and without
us. Like a soap bubble, where there is
air within and air without and a tiny film separating
the two, so are we—THE ABSOLUTE
WITHIN. THE ABSOLUTE WITHOUT.
and nothing but a little film (our present
state of consciousness) which separates the
two for the time being; and some day even
that tiny film will dissolve, and will be found
no more.
TRINITY
This subject must be also approached
from the side of Religion or Philosophy, yet
it is Science which will explain now this
fundamental theological point.
The idea of Trinity is a very ancient one.
As far as we can go, through scientific
investigation, we find in the most ancient
38
religions this idea of Trinity.. We shall
analyze now three different kinds of Trinities
in the most important religions, because
they stand for three distinct conceptions.
The first Trinity, the Egyptian Trinity,-
OSIRIS THE FATHER, ISIS THE MOTHER,
HORUS THE SUN. Leaving aside the occult
significance, there will be given here the
direct and simple meaning of this Trinity.
It means the Male principle, the Father;
the Female principle, the Mother; and by
the fusion of the Two, the Offspring, the
Child. It is what we see in Nature everywhere.
It is called the Natural Trinity or
the Trinity of Nature. It is a Trinity, but it
is in a way a primitive Trinity.
Second comes the Brahmic Hindu Trinity,
called "Trimurti"- BRAHMA THE
FATHER, VISHNU THE SUN, SIVA THE
OTHER SON. This Trinity means something
entirely different. There is the Father, the
One from whom all things have originated,
the Eternally Unmanifest, and there are
the two manifestations, the two Sons. There
is no Mother. THE PATHER AND THE
MOTHER ARE ONE. Out of the fusion of
Two in One were brought forth Twins and
these Twins are Vishnu and Siva. Vishnu
the Law Giver, the Preserver; Siva the
Destroyer and Regenerator. Translated into
Christian terminology Vishnu, the preserver,
the lover, would be Christ, LOVE; and Siva,
39
the destroyer and regenerator, Lucifer,
MIND. Mind, through his own mistakes,
due to Pride, at first destroys his very life,
but having REALIZED HIS MISDIRECTION
starts to regenerate it, to rebuild it on a
right basis. MIND, WHEN MISAPPLIED,
DEBASES LIFE; PROPERLY USED, EXALTS
IT. In the lesson on Mind Force will be
explained in detail the destructive as well as
constructive activities of Mind.
What is the nature of Siva? In the Hindu
mythology He stands for the destroyer and
regenerator, and is therefore usually represented
as destroying and at the same time
creating life. There are the two Sons of God,
who were both perfect once, but of whom one
has fallen. Lucifer has fallen and become
Satan, the Evil One, the one who claimed his
power as separate from God; but in the
Brahmic (Hindu) religion, he is still worshipped
because he is of divine origin and a
Son of God.
There is a very deep idea hidden in this
worship of Siva. His worshippers perceive
within him the Divine Self, Perfect Intelligence;
and even if he appears now to human
consciousness as the Destroyer, the one to be
feared (to be worshipped with fear) yet this
present state is but a transitory condition,
nothing but a dream, the veil of Matter,
Maya, the Great Illusion. But some day the
radiant Past will reappear in a still more
glorious Future, when Siva and Vishnu will
again be One in their Father-Mother,
40
Brahma, MIND HAVING LEARNED THE
LESSON OF LOVE AND BEING THUS RE-
UNITED WITH HIS TWIN, HIS ETERNAL
MATE, DIVINE LOVE. That is the Brahmic
concept of the Trinity. It is an entirely
different conception from the old Egyptian
Trinity.
Last comes the Christian Trinity-GOD
THE FATHER, TIIB SON, AND THE HOLY
GHOST. This Trinity is the latest revelation
to Humanity of the Absolute. In our present
state of consciousness we cannot imagine
anything more ideal than this Trinity, yet it
has only one Father, one Son and one Holy
Ghost, of Whom it is said the Three are One
and yet are Three, God the Father, God the
Son, and God the holy Ghost. The ordinary
explanation is that there is God, called the
Father, the Son called Christ, and the Holy
Ghost, the Spirit, emanating from the
Father. The Roman Catholic Church says
the Holy Ghost emanates also from the Son,
and that affirmation of the Catholics "and
from the Son" (Filioque), introduced into
the Credo of the Western Church in 589
A. D. at the Council of Toledo (Spain)
caused later on the separation of the Western
and the Eastern Churches. Before that time
the Churches were one; but when the words
"AND FROM THE SON" (Filioque) were
added to that passage in the Credo "The
Holy Ghost proceeds from the Father," the
Eastern Church, which claimed that it had
41
received the Credo direct from the Apostles,
whose teachings say only "from the Father,"
refused to accept that addition. Prom that
time the two Churches separated and they
have remained separate up to the present
day. They are still divided and refuse to be
reconciled. The reason why they seemingly
cannot be reconciled is because they are
seeing the same thing from two different
angles. They feel intuitively that they are
both right, yet appearances seem to show
the reverse. All this seeming disagreement
can be explained away through Science. If
we begin to reason from the point of view of
Religion, what the Trinity is, and how it is
that there are Three Persons in One, we can
never come to any logical conclusion. Nor
can we ever have a satisfactory explanation
of why God Who is God, the Great All, has
only one Son, the Only Begotten One. Why
is it that human beings can have many sons,
and the Infinite God has only one Son? Why
is God, illimitable in other directions, so
limited in that direction. He could have had
more than the one Son we know of. In the
Brahmic Hindu Trinity, there are two
Sons, and yet in the Christian Trinity there
is only One Son. There is a reason for it.
Who is God? Who is the Father? The
Father is that eternally Unmanifest Principle,
the First Great Cause, the Absolute. That
is the Father. Who is the Only Begotten
Son? It is the Whole Universe, including
Man. THE UNIVERSE AS A WHOLE
42
IS THE ONLY SON OF GOD. God, the
Unmanifest, the Great Principle, has never
created another Universe, because from
Eternity He has evolved it out of Himself
and made it His exact counterpart. THE
PROOF OF DIVINITY EXISTS. HIS ONLY
CHILD, HIS WITNESS, IS THE UNIVERSE,
INCLUDING MAN, and Christ is the ideal
Man. The Universe is the Absolute made
manifest; therefore IT IS OF DIVINE ORIGIN,
COEXISTENT, COETERNAL, AND CO-
EQUAL WITH THE FATHER.
Who is the Holy Ghost? The Holy
Ghost is that all pervading and sustaining
Force expressed in the word "Principle," AS
SUSTAINING POWER, which continually
flows from the Father to the Son, from the
Unmanifest, the Great Principle, to Its
Manifestation, the Universe. That power,
which conveys Life, Intelligence, Truth and
Love to the Worlds? from Eternity to Eternity,
is the Holy Ghost who proceeds from
the Father and goes to the Son; and these
Three are logically One. They cannot be
separated. As the five activities of the word
"Principle" cannot be separated, so the
Three the Unmanifest Great Principle, the
Father, the Manifested Universe, the Son,
and the Conscious, Loving Life Force, the
Sustaining Power, the Holy Ghost-cannot
be separated. THEY ARE ONE and yet they
are distinctly THREE. Therefore the Eastern
Church, which says the Holy Ghost proceeds
from the Father to the Son, is right.
43
Yet the Roman Catholics are also right,
because after the Holy Ghost, the Intelligent
Loving Life Force, has proceeded from the
Unmanifest, the Absolute, the Father, to
Its Manifestation, the Universe, the Son, It
does not remain there. It has to go back to
the Father, because the Father is the All-
Inclusive Great All. If the Holy Ghost were
not to return from the Son to the Father, the
cycle would be incomplete; yet the cycle
must be completed because there is no other
place for It to go (the Father being All) except
to return to Its First Cause, the Father.
There is a continual going forth, and returning
to Its Own Origin, of that Eternal, Conscious,
Loving Force called the Holy Ghost.
Therefore THE HOLY GHOST PROCEEDS
ALSO FROM THE SON, and the Roman
Catholics are right as well as the Greek
Catholics, the Greek Church seeing one
side of the Eternal Fact and the Catholics
seeing the other side also.
We are all looking for Divinity, the Great
Principle, the Absolute; we are seeking It
somewhere far away and yet we do not realize
that WE LIVE ALL THE TIME IN THE
CLOSEST CONTACT WITH THE GREAT ALL,
AS WE ARE A PART OF IT. In the whole of
Nature, in everything, in everyone, there is
the Great Principle, Divinity, continually
in Its three Aspects, in the Unmanifest by
what we feel, in the Manifested Aspect by
what we perceive, and in Its Third Aspect
44
by what we know. Therefore the Absolute
is always present in Its full force even though
we are unconscious of Its presence. We
cannot evade It; wherever we go, there is the
Great All. When we contact nothing but
air, there It is. Even the Ether is a manifestation
of It. Whenever we are with
human beings there we contact the Great
Principle in Its highest Aspect on Earth,
because EACH HUMAN BEING IS THE SON
OF GOD, IS THE MOST TANGIBLE MANI-
FESTATION OF DIVINITY, IS A POINT IN
WHICH ALL ITS FORCES AND POWERS ARE
FOCUSED. Therefore whenever we are with
human beings we must remember we are not
away from the Absolute; we are in the midst
of the Great Spirit manifested in body; we
are in Divine company; and that is why,
especially when we look into the eyes of
people, we see something divine in their
eyes, because THROUGH THE EYES OF MAN
WE SEE GOD, Who looks at us through those
windows of the Soul. Jesus said, "Whoever
has seen me has seen the Father." And He
told an absolute truth. He made a scientific
statement, because in His clear eyes they
could see His Father, God Himself. Through
all our eyes, through the eyes of each individual,
we can see God shining. When an
individual smiles with the eyes, tenderly,
sincerely, the look is so precious, is so
wonderful, because IT IS DIVINITY SMIL-
ING. That is why people, when they love,
look into each others eyes; they are never
45
tired of doing it, for how can one be ever
tired of looking at Divinity? The emotion of
Love is for us the key which opens the gates
of Heaven. In reality we do not love human
beings; we think we do. We love Divinity
through human beings. We have that longing
and yearning within us to go back to the
Father, to the Absolute, and whenever we
find a channel through which we can achieve
that return to Him, a channel opened by
Love, we are only too glad to use it, because
it is the inmost desire of our heart, it is the
love of our Soul. The Great Principle is
manifest everywhere and everywhere unmanifest;
and therefore Heaven, Harmony,
is not far away in unknown regions; it is
always about us, IT IS OUR PRIVILEGE
AND DUTY TO DISCOVER IT, NOW AND
HERE. For this reason Jesus said that to
"Love God with all one's strength, and to
Love one's neighbor as one's self," are the
two greatest commandments. He knew that
IP WE LOVE IN THAT WAY, WE FULFIL
AN ETERNAL LAW, WE BECOME ONE WITH
TILE GREAT PRINCIPLE: we have then
reached absolute Unity with It, because we
have united ourselves with Divinity in both
Aspects, the Unmanifest and the Manifest.
46
SCIENTIFIC DEFINITION
OF MAN
MAN IS THE INDIVIDUALIZED PROJEC-
TION OF THE GREAT PRINCIPLE INTO ITS
OWN ETERNAL SUBSTANCE. PROCEED-
ING FROM THE GREAT PRINCIPLE AND
INDISSOLUBLY CONNECTED WITH IT,
MANIFESTING ALL ITS QUALITIES AND
POWERS, MAN IS INDEED THE IMAGE
AND LIKENESS OF THE ABSOLUTE. HE IS
COEXISTENT AND COETERNAL WITH HIS
FATHER, THE GREAT PRINCIPLE. TO
KNOW MAN IN THE PRESENT STATE OF
HUMAN CONSCIOUSNESS IS AS GREAT A
PROBLEM AS TO KNOW THE ABSOLUTE
ITSELF. MAN SEES MAN AS THROUGH A
DARK CLOUD; VEILED. BUT WHEN MAN
WILL BE REVEALED TO HIMSELF AS HE
REALLY IS, THE WITNESS OF THE GREAT
ALL, THAT DAY THE MYSTERY OF GOD
WILL BE SOLVED, BECAUSE MAN FACING
HIS OWN REAL SELF WILL THUS FACE
GOD.
47
LESSON ONE
1. QUES. What is the subject of the firstlesson?
ANS. A Scientific Explanation of the
Great AII,and Man's relation to it,
2. QUES. What are the causes of the GreatAll?
ANS. There is but one Causeless Cause,
called the Eternally Unmanifest,
the Absolute.
3. QUES. What is Primal Energy? Where
did it originate?
ANS. Primal Energy is the first manifestation
of the Unmanifest,
called God.
4. QUES. Is Primal Energy limited in
Space, Time, or Power?
ANS. No. It is filling all Space, is allpervading,
and therefore infinite.
It endures through All Time, and
is therefore eternal. It includes
all Forces, and is therefore allpowerful.
5. QUES. What are the basic qualities of
Primal Energy?
ANS. Motion and Attraction.
6. QUES. How many kinds of movements
are there in Motion?
ANS. Two kinds, the rotary and the
propulsory movements.
7. QUES. What word expresses most completely
the nature and activity of
the Absolute?
ANS. The word "Principle."
48
8. QUES. What is the scientific definition of
the word "Principle?"
ANS. Principle is that which creates,
constitutes, governs, sustains and
contains all.
9. QUES. Who is the "Great Principle?"
ANS. The Causeless Cause, the Unmanifest,
the Absolute called
God.
10. QUES. What are the Aspects of theGreat Principle in the present
state of human consciousness?
ANS. They are Life, Mind, Truth
(Law) and Love which, taken all
together, culminate in Spirit.
11. QUES. What is the relation of thoseAspects of the Great Principle
to the scientific definition of It?
ANS. Life creates all. Mind constitutes
all. Truth (Law) governs all.
Love sustains all. Spirit contains
all.
12. QUES. Are those Aspects simultaneous
and instantaneous?
ANS. Yes, they are, though kept in a
certain logical order which cannot
be changed.
13. QUES. What geometrical figures do they
form?
ANS. A Square and a Pyramid.
14. QUES. What do those two figures mean?
ANS. Perfection, Harmony and Power.
15. QUES. What are the four corners of theSquare?
49
ANS. Life, Mind ,Truth (Law) and Love.
16. QUES. What are the two greatest powers
of today?
ANS. Mind and Love.
17. QUES. What do they represent?
ANS. Mind represents Lucifer fallen
from his high estate, waiting for
redemption. Love represents
Christ.
18. QUES. Can Lucifer( Mind) be redeemed?
ANS. Yes, through Christ(Love).
19. QUES. What are their relations tohuman beings?
ANS. They are the two fundamental
elements, the two poles in each
human being.
20. QUES. How is the Pyramid formed?
ANS. By simultaneously erecting the
four corners of the Square (Life,
Mind, Truth, and Love) to a
convergent central point, which
is Spirit.
21. QUES. What relations have the Squareand the Pyramid of Life to
human beings?
ANS. The first is the foundation. The
latter is the working out of the
human character.
22. QUES. How is that achieved?
ANS. By performing all actions energetically,
intelligently, accurately
and joyfully.
23. QUES. What does it mean to live Life
correctly?
50
ANS. It means to perform one's duties
always at the right time.
24. QUES. What does it mean, to live Life
intelligently?
ANS. It means always to keep a proper
sense of values, to take the essen-
tial,leaving the non-essential to its
proper place. Above all, it means
not to lose oneself in details.
25. QUES. What does it mean, to live a life
of Truth?
ANS. It means to be always truthful to
one s own self, in feeling, in
thought, in word, and in deed.
26. QUES. What does it mean, to manifest
Love in one's life, to live lovingly?
ANS. It means to give always, to everybody,
under all circumstances,
the radiance of one's Love.
27. QUES. What practical result is obtained
in living according to the four
principles of the Square?
ANS. Spirit that is, all freedom, all
harmony, all power is reached.
28. QUES. How many Statements of Being
are there in the present state of
human consciousness?
ANS. There are five:
The sum of all lives Is the
The sum of all in-Great
intelligences Principle,
The sum of all truths the
The sum of all loves Absolute,
The sum of all beings called
God.
29. QUES. What do they mean?
ANS. They mean the Oneness of the
Great Principle, the Great All.
30. QUES. What is Man's relation to the
Great Principle, according to
those five Statements of Being?
ANS. Man is an integral part of the
Great Principle, of that Great
All called God, described in those
51
five Statements of Being. As
long as Man realizes his actual
Oneness with that Ocean of
Force, Knowledge, Truth and
Love, he has power; once apart
from it, he is without power.
31. QUES. Can Man's relation to the Great
Principle ever be actually broken?
ANS. No, it can not, though Man may
become unconscious of it, thus
seemingly breaking away from
the Great Principle.
32. QUES. Why are there FIVE words whichdefine "Principle," FIVE aspects
of the Great Principle, FIVE
Statements of Being, FIVE senses,
FIVE fingers, etc.? Why is the
number FIVE everywhere so
dominant?
ANS. Because Humanity is now living
in the Fifth Period of its evolution,
allegorically referred to in
the Bible as the Fifth Day of
Creation. For that reason also
is the five-pointed star con52
sidered the emblem of the
Humanity of today.
33. QUES. What are the three attributes ofthe Great Principle?
ANS. They are Omnipresence, Omniscience,
and Omnipotence.
31. QUES. What is the practical value ofthose attributes to human beings?
ANS. In realizing Man's Oneness with
the Great Principle, all Force,
all Knowledge, all Power can be
actually demonstrated in daily
life.
35. QUES. What does the word "Trinity"
mean?
ANS. It means Tri-unity, or three in
One.
36. QUES. What are the three main concepts
of the Trinity?
ANS. 1. The Egyptian: Osiris the
Father, Isis the Mother, and
Horus the Son. (The Trinity
of the Life Plane.)
2. The Hindu: Brahma the
Father-Mother, and two Sons,
Vishnu and Siva. (The Trinity
of the Mind Plane.)
3. The Christian: God the Father,
God the Son, and God the
Holy Ghost. (The Trinity of
the Soul Plane.)
37. QUES. Which of these concepts of the
Trinity is most important?
ANS. The Christian concept, because it
53
is the latest revelation of Truth to
Humanity.
38. QUES. What does the Christian Trinitymean?
ANS. God the Father is the Eternally
Unmanifest, the Great Principle,
the Absolute. The Son is Its Eternal
Manifestation, the Universe,
the Only Child ever begotten
of God, coexistent, coequal,
and coeternal with the Father.
The Universe is the actual proof
of the existence of God. The
Holy Ghost is the Force of Life,
of Intelligence, of Truth (Law),
and of Love, eternally proceeding
from the Father, the Great
Principle, to the Son, the
Universe, and returning from the
Son to the Father.
39. QUES. Where is the Great Principle?
ANS. Everywhere.
40. QUES. Can one love God, the GreatPrinciple, without first loving
Man, animals, and Nature in
general?
ANS. No. Everything in Nature is an
expression of the Great Principle,
and no man can love that which
he has not seen before loving
that which he has seen.
41. QUES. What are animals, plants, minerals,
etc., and what is their
relation to Man?
54
ANS. They are also perfect and eternal
manifestations of the Great
Principle, Man's younger brothers,
who must obey Man and
whom Man must govern and
protect with love.
42. QUES. What is Man?
ANS. Man is the highest known Manifestation
of the Unmanifest, the
Image and Likeness of God, the
Witness of the Absolute. He is
perfect, coexistent and coeternal
with his Father, the Great
Principle.
43. QUES. How can one know God?
ANS. By knowing one's own True Self.
41. QUES. Are the terms, "the Causeless
Cause, the Unmanifest, the
Absolute, the Great Principle,
God," synonymous?
ANS. Yes, they are.
55
56
57
58
RIMAL Energy, as was explained
in the first lesson, is
the Fundamental Force of the
Universe. It underlies, pervades,
and sustains everything,
fills all Space, endures throughout
Eternity, and is the Source of all power. It
is indeed the very Life of the Universe. As
such, it is in perpetual motion, expressing
itself through what are called vibrations.
IN THE ABSOLUTE THERE IS ONLY ONE
KIND OF VIBRATIONS, THE SPIRITUAL. IN
THE PRESEN'I' STATE OF HUMAN CON-
SCIOUSNESS THOSE SPIRITUAL VIBRA-
TIONS APPEAR AS A THREE FOLD RAY1.
LIFE VIBRATIONS (MAGNETIC)
59
2. MIND VIBRATIONS (MENTAL)
3. SOUL VIBRATIONS (SPIRITUAL)
The present state of human consciousness,
called THE TRIUNE STATE, acts like a
prism through which we see those SPIPITUAI.
VIBRATIONS divided into three distinct
rays, according to three planes, the physical,
the mental, and the Spiritual. And each
kind of vibration is expressing itself in a
different way, which conforms to its own
particular laws. Yet they all come from, and
return to, the same Source, and have one
UNIVERSAL LAW, called the Great Law,
underlying all the other individual laws
which govern them. Just as the prismatic
lens splits into its component colors the
white ray of the sun, so does the prism of
our Triune State of consciousness resolve
the Universal Spiritual Vibrations into their
three primary aspects.
Life, or Magnetic Vibrations, and Mind,
or Mental Vibrations, can be readily demonstrated
by us at any time. Life Vibrations,
being the immediate object of our understanding,
are naturally the easiest to deal
with, as they belong to the physical plane
on which we now live. Mind Vibrations are
more difficult to handle, because we do not
live completely on the mental plane. The
proof that we do not yet live completely on
the mental plane is that our thoughts must
all be translated into material form in order
to become tangible to our senses. As to
what concerns the Spiritual Vibrations, only
60
on rare occasions do we consciously contact
them. Seldom do we perceive the Spirit
now, though we are unconsciously in direct
and constant relation with It. In the sixth
lesson will be explained the science of Mental
Vibrations, and in the seventh lesson how to
reach the highest, the Spiritual ones.
Life Vibrations are also called Magnetic
Vibrations, because they possess that fundamental
quality of Attraction. In the first
lesson, when describing Primal Energy, it
was stated that it possesses two primary
qualities, Motion and Attraction. In the
practical application of Magnetic Vibrations,
those qualities are continually used in
order to obtain the desired constructive
results. Magnetic Vibrations are essentially
important because they not only permeate
the whole Universe and underlie everything,
but because they constitute the very element
out of which our bodies and the whole visible
Universe is made. The great practical value
of those Life Vibrations is that we do not
need concentration or strong mental effort
to contact them. All we need to do is to
become conscious of their continual flow into
us, and thus establish the so-called contact.
No matter what we do, be it a physical,
mental, or emotional activity, we should
never use our own very limited supply of
life energy. This must be the cardinal point
always to be remembered. We should always
take the trouble to make the contact with
the Universal Reservoir of that Force, and
61
then the more we use it, the more we have,
because it is the everlasting Fount of Life
which always gives us more than we can
receive. The question may arise, why is it
necessary to make that contact with the
Universal Life Energy? Are we not in
direct and constant communication with it
at all times? Yes, we are, but we are not
conscious of it. On the contrary, we consciously
believe that we are independent of
it, that we have a life force of our own. We
think we are separated from ALL POWER,
and "as a man thinketh in his heart, so is he."
Therefore we need to re-establish on the
mental plane that which was lost there,
though actually we have never lost that contact
on the Spiritual plane. Spirit KNOWS
that contact to be an eternal fact. On the
physical plane one it. But mind, on
the mental plane on which were produced
all the mistakes and errors ever made,
because of that original error of seeming
separation from ALL, POWER, believes in
separation, and thus makes it real. As long
as we are not conscious of that flow of
Universal Life Energy through us, we do not
derive much benefit from it, even though it
is there.
There are different methods of contacting
Primal Energy. The easiest and the simplest
way is through mental contact. In
order to do it, we must relax as completely
as we can, physically, mentally, and
emotionally. And when we feel harmony
62
within us as a result of that relaxation,-then
we must say to ourselves the following words:
"I AM ONE WITH UNIVERSAL LIFE
ENERGY. IT IS FLOWING THROUGH ME
NOW. I FEEL IT." Thus we open the
mental door which separated the life force
within us from the Life Energy without.
And the force within, because of its inherent
quality of Attraction, contacts the Force
from without, which then begins to pour
into us with an ever increasing power. Then
the more we use that Force, the more it is
supplied from the Infinite Source. In spite of
the simplicity of the method, not everybody
is at first able to use it successfully, because
of the doubt which some people may entertain
in their hearts of the efficiency of such a
mental contact. We must also remember
that on the mental plane we are a law unto
ourselves. If we believe in a thing, and
state our faith in it, it will be so. But if we
doubt or fear, we ourselves thus prevent its
realization. In order to overcome that difficulty
and enable everybody, even the most
skeptical and timid, to make successfully
that conscious contact with the Universal
Life Energy, there is another method which
will be explained a method of pure physical
contact, based on the operation of physical
laws. That second method has this advantage
over the mental one, that it does not
require any faith in it. It works for the
reason that the physical laws are there put
into operation, and the physical contact
63
with the Universal Energy is made, not
because we think it or want it, but because
we cannot help it. Obviously, if we also
think about that Universal Life Energy
flowing through us at the moment of physical
contact with it, it will work all the better.
Yet if we do not think at all about it, it still
will work, because of the aforesaid reasons.
That second, the physical method, is based
on a certain exercise, called the "STAR
EXERCISE." The reason why this posture
is called the Star Exercise is because the
individual, when taking it, has to place his
body in such a position that it will fit into
the five points of a star. The Five Pointed
Star, the emblem of the Humanity of today,
the occult sign of the Fifth Period of Human-
ity's evolution, is also called the Pentagram.
According to the alchemists of mediaeval
times, the Pentagram was considered to be
the key to all powers. The Philosopher's
Stone, the Elixir of Life, and many other
wonderful things, were supposed to be
obtained whenever that sign was properly
used. Yet the alchemists, though perceiving
the truth back of that sign, saw only its
geometrical form; that is, the dead letter of
it, which had no actual power. The living
force back of it, the spirit of it, remained
veiled to them. In this Age, the veil is
lifted, arid the complete truth, spirit and
letter, is revealed. And the mysterious
sign, the Pentagram, becomes indeed a KEY
TO' ALL POWER, as it unlocks and brings
64
forth in Man all his latent powers and forces.
It is when the human body takes the position
as shown in the diagrams following that the
actual contact of the life energy within is
made with the Universal Life Energy without.
And a man's physical, mental, and
emotional development will be thus stimulated
by an ever increasing Force. Standing
straight, but relaxed, with legs spread to a
degree corresponding to the design, the
arms stretched to either side on a level with
the shoulders, and with head erect, the
human body will fit 'into the five pointed
star. Even the proportions of a normally
built body will correspond to the figure of
the star. The head fits into the upper point,
the two arms into the two side points, the
torso into the center, and the legs into the
two lower points. The palm of the left
hand should be turned up, and that of the
right turned down. The whole body must
remain erect, but not tense. The heart,
situated on the left side of the human body,
is not only the central pumping station
which takes in and sends out the blood
through the whole body, but is also the
apparatus which sucks in and pours out
Life Energy. The palm of the left band,
turned up, draws in through its complicated
network of nerves the Universal Energy
present in the surrounding atmosphere.
That drawing action is due to the pumping
activity of the heart, and the stream of Life
Force pours into the body because of the
65
attraction exercised on it by the inner life
force of the body itself. Through the hand,
arm, and heart the Life Energy flows to the
solar plexus, whence it is distributed by way
of the spinal nerve throughout the whole
body. A certain amount of it is stored in the
solar plexus. and the surplus sent out
through the right hand, whose palm is turned
down, It is especially through the finger
tips of the right hand that the Force is flowing
out of the body toward the earth, which
attracts it because of the same Law of
Attraction. Thus is established a current of
Universal Energy, penetrating from the
Infinite Source into the human body, invigorating
and purifying it, and flowing out
of it only to return with ever increasing
power. The left palm, turned up, takes the
position of a receiving hand, and the right,
with palm turned down, appears to bless.
In fact, this is so. Our left hand receives all
blessings from the Infinite, which our being,
having assimilated, in its turn gives out as
blessings through the right hand. Not only
through the left hand does the Life Force
penetrate into the body; it pours in also
through every cell, and very strongly
through the solar plexus. Yet during the
exercise the main current is received as
stated above. Shortly after having taken the
position, one begins to feel a certain heaviness
in the palm of the left hand. It is as if a
heavy ball were pressing on the palm. And
one is sensible of a kind of tingling in the
66
finger tips of the right hand. These two
different sensations are due to the influx and
outpouring of Life Force. Thus the individual
feels that the contact is established.
There are a few more important points
to be remembered in connection with that
exercise, The best times to perform it are
in the morning, immediately after getting
up, before doing anything else, and at night
before going to bed. When performed in
the morning, this exercise will stimulate
all one's physical, mental, and emotional
activities, because of the ascending magnetic
currents of the new day, which impregnate
67
their local color in the exercise. In the evening,
on the contrary, the same exercise produces
an opposite effect. It soothes and
disposes one to sleep, in harmony with all
Nature, because of the downward curve of
the local magnetic currents.
Three to five minutes is all that is needed
to perform the Star Exercise, For beginners,
it would be inadvisable to do it longer,
because of the very strong inpour of magnetic
forces. But later on, when the body becomes
accustomed to that inflow of magnetic currents,
the duration of the Star Exercise can
be prolonged to fifteen minutes, and the
exercise taken more than twice a day. During
that exercise, one ought to be dressed
as lightly as possible, in order to leave the
body free and without pressure on any part
of it. A body without any covering is of
course the most responsive. The exercise
should be performed in front of an open
window, and, if the temperature and circumstances
permit, out of doors. The Star
Exercise should never be taken immediately
after a meal. At least an hour must elapse
between the two; otherwise a most violent
nausea, and sometimes indigestion, may
result, as the magnetic current has the same
effect on digestion as an electrical storm has
on milk. It curdles the food in process of
digestion, because of its strong chemical
action. Deep, rhythmic breathing is very
helpful in connection with the exercise,
because of the stimulating effect of the
68
oxygen. In the beginning, one's arms may
feel tired in the performance of the exercise.
No effort should be used to keep the arms up
in their proper position. Let them drop, and
lift them again when rested. Otherwise the
tension of the muscles and nerves resulting
from a prolonged forced elevation of the
arms will counteract, to a great extent, the
flow of the Force through them.
The exercise works so automatically that
there is no imperative need to think about
the Force flowing through the body. It
will flow anyway, because of the Law of
Attraction. There is no necessity of turning
the face north, because the points of the
compass are of no importance to those who
use Universal Energy, which is limitless.
The Star Exercise is exceedingly beneficial
to children. It stimulates all of their bodies,
especially their brain centers, and those
glands which play such an important role
in their growth and development. It also
harmonizes their emotional side with the
rest of their being, and establishes strength
and poise where before was weakness and
restlessness.
The Star Exercise ought to become a
part of the daily routine for everyone, young
and old, sick or healthy, weak or strong.
It is to be carried on regularly through all
one's life, to the very end, and the surprising
positive results will exceed the most sanguine
expectations. It is like watering a plant
with Life Itself, so that it should grow with
69
an ever-increasing vigor. It is indeed Life,
in its strongest and purest form, that one is
able to contact through the Star Exercise,
and use for the greatest unfoldment of one's
body, mind, and soul. For some time in the
beginning that process of unfoldment may
be rather slow. But one must persevere, and
complete success will be the reward of that.
perseverance.
When using Magnetic Vibrations, faith
is not necessary. One can do without it.
Nevertheless, faith is very helpful. The socalled
miraculous healings performed on
large crowds who come to be cured by some
of the Evangelist healers, is one of the easiest
things .to perform. It is much more difficult
to heal patients singly. Each person in the
crowd carries within him a certain light of
faith, an open channel for the Life Force to
flow through. Individually, these do not
amount to much, but when counted by
hundreds or maybe thousands, they become
a great light, a tremendous power, a broad
avenue of faith, over which the Magnetic
Life Force is then conveyed as well to each
individual singly as to the whole crowd
collectively. There each person is benefited
by the addition to his own little faith of all
the other faiths present. Naturally the
result thus obtained is usually a great
success.
Primal Energy, as was explained in the
first lesson, has two fundamental qualities,
Motion and Attraction. In its aspect of
70
Life Energy, it has also two other qualities.
First, it is SELFT GOVERNING, second, it is
BASICALLY HARMONIOUS. Like all elements,
Life Energy is self-governing. Physical
laws, expressing themselves through the
elements, are back of that self government.
For instance, water contained in any vessel,
no matter what position that vessel may
take, will always automatically maintain a
level parallel to that of the sea. The air will
rush into a vacuum through the most
minute opening. Mercury, when broken
into small particles, automatically takes the
form of spheres, etc. Elements always
choose the path of least resistance and seek
equilibrium. The quality of self-govern-
ment which Life Energy possesses is exceptionally
practicable and valuable, and simplifies
greatly the use of it. The following
examples will explain how it works. Suppose
there are two individuals, sitting one on the
right side, the other on the left side, of the
operator. The one on the right side, for
some reason, feels very cold; the one on the
left, hot. In order to re-establish normal
conditions in the two, all the operator needs
to do is to make the mental contact with
Universal Life Energy, and then take in each
of his hands a hand of either patient. The
contact thus established, the Force flows
through the operator to his patients. Being
self-governed the Force automatically works
to meet the requirements of the case. In the
first instance it warms, in the second it cools,
71
thus simultaneously establishing equilibrium
in both. Especially in healing does this
quality become invaluable. It does away
almost entirely with the necessity of knowing
the nature and location of the ailment. All
one needs to do, in magnetic treatment, is
to let the Force flow into the patient; and
the Force, being self-governing, will always
go to the spot where it is needed. For
instance, a patient complains of heart
trouble. The operator sends the Magnetic
Force into the patient. The Force itself discovers
in the patient some other unsuspected
and possibly more serious ailments, perhaps
in the lungs or kidneys. It will then automatically
flow more to the lungs or kidneys
than to the heart, because of the greater
need. That is why everybody, even children
who are too young to know the mental laws
operating in mental healing, can so successfully
use the magnetic current.
Primal Energy, being the foundation of
all there is, is by nature perfectly harmonious.
Therefore, Life Energy, as its first
aspect, must possess the same inherent
quality. That is, it must be basically
harmonious. It is mind alone which, when
misdirected, covers that Life Energy with a
negative film. But whenever that Force is
taken direct from its Infinite Source there
it flows, perfectly harmonious, healing, and
constructive in every way. The magnetic
current, when flowing from the Infinite,
carries with it such a sense of harmony that
72
it harmonizes even the very channel through
which it flows-that is the operatoralthough
he may have felt quite inharmonious
when starting the treatment. The last
quality gives to the Magnetic Vibrations a
great superiority over the Mental ones,
because no successful healing or other work
can be achieved if the thoughts of the
operator are not harmonious at the very
start. The slightest disharmony on the
plane of Mind is most destructive to the
subject on which the thought is operating.
Most of the physical discomfort is caused
by either congestion or lack of magnetic
forces in certain parts of the body, and needs
the contact with an outside magnetic current
to re-establish equilibrium. For instance, a
sudden shock makes one's heart contract.
Life force is thrown out of it. As a result, one
feels a pain in the heart. Involuntarily
one's hand is pressed to the heart. The
magnetic current of the body, sent out from
the solar plexus through the hand, fills the
heart with its vivifying power. The heart
resumes its normal condition, and the pain is
gone. Or again, everyone has observed that
when one thinks deeply, one unconsciously
rests one's head upon the hands. The
reason for it is that the brain, when very
active, either accumulates too much energy,
or not enough, in both cases having its
functioning impaired. In either instance the
magnetic current is required to correct the
discrepancy. Nature sees that it should be
73
done. Instinctively the band is brought
into contact with the head, and the magnetic
current, flowing through the band into the
brain, or vice versa, re-establishes there the
proper balance. The knowledge of bow to
contact and use the magnetic current is
therefore so precious because it enables one
consciously and scientifically to use that
Force whenever there is need of it. What
Nature makes us do instinctively, we can do
with so much better results if we realize
the Laws back of it and know bow to apply
them. All human emotions have the Magnetic
Force back of them, and the way that
Force works through them, being based on
Laws, is so scientific, so accurate, that one
can at once determine the kind of emotion,
and how it should be met, by the way it
expresses itself. Generally speaking, all
emotions, positive and negative, produce, in
certain parts of the body which exactly
correspond to the rate of vibration of each
emotion, an accumulation of the Magnetic
Force. Such accumulation of Force makes
the individual feel uncomfortable, and he
unconsciously seeks de-magnetization by
contacting that part of his body with the
part of another individual's body which will
respond to the rate of vibration of his accumulated
Magnetic Force. For instance
when one loves, the emotion of love stimulates
life currents throughout all the body.
Starting from the heart, the magnetic current
by and by permeates all the body, but
74
concentrates especially in certain centers of
it which, through their delicate and complex
formation, are more apt to express it.
According to a physical law, all vibrations
naturally rise upwards. That being the case,
they rise first from the heart into the head.
There they concentrate, especially in the
eyes and around the lips. The pupils are
enlarged, and the eyes begin to sparkle,
sending out magnetic waves which seek the
eyes of another individual in order to be demagnetized.
The lips, in their turn, more
and more filled with the Life Force, also unconsciously
seek de-inagnetization, which
they achieve through what is commonly
known as a "kiss." If the love of the two
individuals is on the same plane, their lips
will meet, because the magnetic currents are,
in both instances, of the same rate, and seeking
expression through the lips. But if the
love of one individual is more of a mental
type, his lips will seek de-magnetization,
not on the lips of the other individual, but
on the forehead, the seat of thinking powers.
No other place on the face will do, because
nowhere else could de-magnetization take
place, on account of the different rate of
vibration. Like attracts like. If one's, love
is of a more adoring kind, the lips, when
charged with magnetic forces, will seek demagnetization
probably on the hands of the
other individual, or maybe on the knees,
or even at the feet, again on account of like
seeking like. With all other emotions it is
75
the same. In friendship, one's natural
desire is to shake hands with the individual
one loves, or to put the hand on the shoulder
or around the waist. There the hand, the
power to achieve, hued with the magnetic
current, unconsciously seeks dc-magnetiza-
tion in another individual's hand. Or when
the individual feels the emotion of protection,
the impulse is to place his hand on the
other individual's shoulder in a gesture of
protection. Almost everyone has observed
that when two individuals quarrel and a
third one intervenes, they usually turn
against him, and he gets from both of them
the negative which he tried to destroy in
them. Why? Because he unconsciously diverted
their mutual negative passion of
hatred and revenge in his direction. They
were so full of negative vibrations that they
needed mutual dc-magnetization, which
they sought in quarreling. A third party
intervening at that moment directs the
negative currents of both toward that new
and open channel. Therefore, if one does
not know how to approach a case like that,
it is better to abstain from interference, and
let people settle their own differences as
best they can. All they need in such a case
is dc-magnetization, and after they obtain
it they feel more at ease, no matter if the
price they paid for it was some physical,
mental, or moral bruises. The pressure
which they could not bear is gone, and they
feel at ease again. Those few main instances
76
cited above explain clearly how the magnetic
current works through our human emotions.
All prominent and successful men and
women of days gone by and of the present
time, have been consciously or unconsciously
using the Magnetic Force in their lives.
They possess an extraordinary vitality,
which attracts everybody and everything to
them. They have what is called a magnetic
personality. Such a personality, such vitality
and power, can be developed by everyone
through the regular use of the Star Exercise,
and the continual contact with Life Energy,
through the mental method. By and by one
becomes a living magnet, the power of which
is ever increasing, because of its incessant use.
The ancient sages and prophets knew a
great deal about that Magnetic Force, and
most of the so-called miracles performed by
them were accomplished by the use of that
Force. Its widest application it had in healing,
where Life Energy was used most
successfully to dispel all kinds of physical
ailments. T he methods sometimes employed
were very extraordinary, and the following
examples will give an idea of the results
obtained. When crossing the Red Sea,
Moses, who was well versed in all knowledge,
prayed to God-that is, made the mental
contact with Life Energy--and then extended
his hand, holding his rod, toward the
Red Sea. The magnetic current flowed
through his hand and rod with irresistible
force into the surrounding atmosphere, and
77
there created a great disturbance. As a
result, a strong wind arose and pushed back
the waters of the sea, which was shallow
at that particular place, and the Israelites
walked on the bottom of the sea to the other
side. Once safe across, Moses again made
the contact, stretched forth his rod, and
directing the Magnetic Force of the Universe
through it, he reestablished normal atmospheric
conditions. The wind subsided, and
the waters, no longer pushed back by its
pressure, resumed their proper position, and
incidentally drowned the Egyptians ,who were
following them across the bottom of the sea.
Elijah, when bringing back to life the son
of the poor widow in whose house he stayed,
obviously used no other power than the
Magnetic Force. Thrice after having prayed
---that is, made the contact with the
Universal Life Energy did he throw himself
on the body of the dead boy, so as to
send from all his body the life current into
the body which was bereft of it. And after
the third time, the dead boy became alive.
Through the use of the magnetic current
did Jesus still the storm on the Galilean
Sea. And when He was touched in the
throng by a woman suffering from a blood
issue, I-us words "I felt a virtue coming out of
Me" also showed that it was the magnetic
current, the Universal Life Energy flowing
through Him, which did the healing.
The magnetic current can be easily concentrated
also in inanimate objects. Those
78
objects can be so charged with Magnetic
Force that they become themselves dynamic
centers from which the Force is flowing and
carrying its healing vibrations to all those
who happen to contact them. Thus are
scientifically explained those healing properties
which some of the so-called miraculous
shrines throughout the whole world are
supposed to possess. Either by itself, or
through conscious direction of it, the Magnetic
Force was concentrated in those
shrines, and they became real healing
mediums. The healings performed by them
were not what one would call faith cures.
Of course faith was also an important agent,
as it prepared the people to receive the healing.
But the healings themselves were performed
by the Magnetic Force which was
actually emanating from them. It has been
observed that water especially possesses to
an extraordinary degree the faculty of storing
in itself a great deal of Magnetic Force,
and then giving it out when needed. Thousands
of years ago that property was known
to the Ancients, especially in Egypt, India,
and other Southern countries where water,
because of the great heat, is already a strong
vivifying agent, and has been used for healing
purposes. Most of their temples had sacred
pools, the waters of which were blessed, or,
in other words, were magnetized. Those
seeking relief from their ailments plunged
into those pools, and many of them emerged
sound and wholesome. Even in our own day
79
such pools are still in use in India, and the
healing properties of their waters, sometimes
even polluted with all kinds of germs of
infectious diseases left by those who had
sought relief there, are not thereby impaired.
The Magnetic Force in the water is the
stronger, and is able to heal in spite of the
deadly germs. One can make some interesting
experiments oneself in that direction.
For instance, magnetize the water of the
bath, or that to wash the face, or to drink.
That magnetization is called by the Hindus
“Pranization," from the Hindu word
"Prana," or Life Force. All one needs to do
is to make the mental contact with Universal
Energy while standing in front of the water
to be magnetized, with the hands extended
toward it and the finger tips pointing directly
to it, and remain in that position for a few
minutes. The Life Energy will flow through
the hands into the water and will charge it
with Magnetic Force. That water can then
be used, and the benefit derived from it is
considerable. Those who suffer from insomnia
can, by the same method, magnetize
their pillows, sheets, and covers, and enjoy
a sound, healthy sleep as the result of it.
Infinite are the applications for that Force.
In the fourth lesson will be given special
detailed instructions concerning its use in
daily life, and in general work.
80
LESSON TWO
1. QUES. What are Vibrations?
ANS. Certain oscillatory rhythmic
movements of Primal Energy.
2. QUES. How many kinds of vibrations
are there in the Absolute?
ANS. One kind, the Spiritual Vibrations.
3. QUES. How many kinds of vibrations
are there in the present state of
human consciousness?
ANS. Three kinds: Magnetic, Mental
and Spiritual.
4. QUES. Why are there three kinds ofvibrations?
ANS. Because of the Triune State of
the present human consciousness,
through which everything is perceived
as a three-fold ray.
5. QUES. Which vibrations are the easiestto perceive and to handle?
ANS. The Magnetic, or Life Vibrations,
because they are the immediate
object of our understanding and
are fundamental.
6. QUES. From where do these MagneticVibrations emanate?
ANS. From their Eternal Source, called
Universal Energy.
7. QUES. Does that mean that Magnetic
Vibrations are also a kind of
Spiritual Vibrations?
ANS. Yes, they are, only of a slower
rate.
81
8. QUES. What are the methods by which
Universal Life Energy can be
contacted?
ANS. Mental and physical methods.
9. QUES. What is the formula used for
mental contact?
ANS. "I am One with Universal Life
Energy. It is flowing through me
now. I feel it."
10. QUES. Why is it necessary to make the
contact with Universal Life
Energy on the mental plane?
ANS. Because the contact was once
lost on the mental plane and
must therefore be reestablished
on that plane.
11. QUES. Has that contact ever been lost
on the Spiritual Plane?
ANS. No.
12. QUES. What is the physical method of
contacting Universal Life Energy?
ANS. The so-called Star Exercise.
13. QUES. What is the Star Exercise?
ANS. It is a certain posture, the object
of which is to fill the whole body
and especially the solar plexus
with Universal Life Energy.
14. QUES. What is the solar plexus andwhere is it located?
ANS. It is a network of nerves, called
solar because they radiate. It is
located in the dorsal or anterior
part of the abdomen. It is also
called the "abdominal brain."
82
15. QUES. How is the Star Exercise per-
formed?
ANS. Stand relaxed, feet spread apart,
arms outstretched on a level with
the shoulders, palm and finger
tips of right hand turned downward,
and palm and finger tips
of left hand turned upward,
slightly curved, as if to receive
the current of Universal Life
Energy that will flow quite
noticeably through it into one
and through the solar plexus to
any weak part of the body,
strengthening the same and flowing
out through the right hand.
16. QUES. Why is it called the Star Exercise?
ANS. Because it is a posture based on
the geometrical figure of the
Pent-Alpha, or Pentagram, the
symbol of the present Fifth
Race, the Fifth Day of Creation,
the Fifth Period of Humanity's
Evolution.
17. QUES. Should one observe any cardinalpoint such as turning to the
East, or looking toward the
North Star?
ANS. No. One must not limit oneself
to the Earth's magnetic currents.
18. QUES. Does one need to believe in theactual flow of Universal Life
Energy during the Star Exercise?
ANS. No. Universal Life Energy flows
83
into the human body in obedience
to physical laws.
19. QUES. Does this Exercise influence every-
one alike?
ANS. No. It may cool one and warm
another but it gives to each just
what is needed, when it is needed
and where it is needed.
20. QUES. What are he qualities of UniversalLife Energy?
ANS. It is self-governed and basically
harmonious.
21. QUES. Has Universal Life Energy some
other qualities?
ANS. Yes. It has two fundamental
qualities, referred to in the first
lesson. They are Motion and
Attraction.
22. QUES. What is the practical value ofthose qualities of Universal Life
Energy in daily life?
ANS. Their practical value resides in
the fact that because of those
qualities, Universal Life Energy
can be used automatically without
any special mental concentration
or application of will power.
Magnetic Vibrations always produce
constructive and harmonious
results, because of their inherent
qualities.
23. QUES. How often and for how longshould one perform that Star
Exercise?
84
ANS. For beginners, twice a day, in
the morning and in the evening,
from three to five minutes each
time and whenever fatigued, but
never too soon after a meal.
24. QUES. Why is the Magnetic Forcewithout evil, constructive and
harmonious?
ANS. Because it proceeds as a pure
stream from its Infinite and
Eternal Source, Primal Energy.
25. QUES. Can it become evil?
ANS. Yes, thought can make it inharmonious
by clothing it with a
negative mental film.
26. QUES. Does the magnetic current attract
or repel?
ANS. It attracts, but by using will
power and thought it can be made
repellent.
27. QUES. How do the Magnetic Vibrationsaffect the brain?
ANS. They stimulate all the brain cells,
thereby increasing the activities
of the brain.
28. QUES. How often should one make the
.mental contact with Universal
Life Energy?
ANS. As often as there is any sort of
work to be done, in any activity,
physical, mental, or emotional.
29. QUES. What is the practical result offrequent mental contact with
Universal Life Energy?
85
ANS. All work will become easy,
because of the increasing capacity
for manifesting Life Energy.
30. QUES. How can one develop a magnetic
personality?
ANS. By becoming a living magnet
through continual contact with
Universal Life Energy.
31. QUES. What causes most of the physical
discomfort and pain?
ANS. Excessive accumulation or congestion
of magnetic currents in
certain parts of the body.
32. QUES. How can such congestion berelieved?
ANS. By demagnetizing the congested
spot through laying on of hands.
33. QUES. What are emotions?
ANS. They are manifestations of Magnetic
Vibrations of different rates
which, when accumulated in
various parts of the body, create
there congestions that can be
relieved only by demagnetization
86
of that part. Such demagnetization
is achieved through a kiss,
a handshake, laying on of hands,
kind words, looks, thoughts, etc.
Congestions of negative vibrations
are ignorantly relieved by
fist blows, harsh words, looks,
thoughts, etc.
34. QUES. What is magnetic chemicalization?
ANS. It is a reaction following Magnetic
Vibration. Somewhere in
the body of the patient there may
be negative thought-germs, discordant,
but almost Unnoticeable
because possessed of little
life force. When the magnetic
current arouses them they become
alive, inflate to the limit, then
burst. After they burst they are
utterly destroyed and the patient
is healed.
35. QUES. What is the explanation of suc-
cess in life?
ANS. The use of Universal Life Energy.
36. QUES. Is it always used consciously?
ANS. No. Sometimes consciously, most
times unconsciously.
37. QUES. What power was used to accomplish
most of the miracles in the
past, and is now employed in the
so-called "faith cures?"
ANS. The Magnetic Force.
38. QUES. Are the terms "Universal Life
87
Energy, Life Force, Magnetic
Force, Magnetic Current, Magnetic
Vibrations," synonymous?
ANS. YES
39. QUES. Why is there more than one term?
ANS. To secure emphasis of one or the
other of the qualities implied in
the terms. "Energy" refers to
power, "Life" to the quality of
motion, and "Magnetic" to the
quality of attraction, inherent in
Universal Life Energy.
88
89
90
ROM times immemorial,
Matter has been a thing of
the greatest mystery, which
Religion and Philosophy have
tried more or less unsuccessfully
to explain. Most religions of days
gone by and those in use until now, qual-
ify Matter as transitory, temporal, con-
tra-distinct to the permanency of Spirit.
They call it a Veil, Dream, Illusion, Dust,
etc. Some religious movements absolutely
refuse to acknowledge the existence of
Matter. Their teachings are based on its
complete denial, they call Matter error,
evil. Yet religions have never been able to
explain Matter in a satisfactory way. After
91
all it was not their province to do so. It is
only Science especially modern Material
Science-which has been able to explain
what Matter really is. Matter is called by
the Hindus "Maya," the "Great Illusion,"
Why? Because seemingly we can never take
hold of it. As soon as we think that we
have hold of Matter, it eludes us. It is of
all things the most elusive that we know.
Matter appears to us usually in three distinct
aspects-solid, liquid and gaseous
form-due to different rates of vibrations.
Certain manifestations of it commonly
assume a solid aspect, such as stones, metals,
wood, etc., some a liquid, such as water,
mercury, etc., some a gaseous form, such as
vapors, air, and different gases; but each of
these material things may also be obtained
in the two other aspects, if their rate of
vibration is changed. For example, let us
take ice. When a piece of ice is placed in a
warm atmosphere, it melts. Thus we have
the first transformation of Matter; from solid
it becomes liquid. Ice becomes water. If
the temperature is raised to a still further
degree, the water evaporates, becomes steam,
-another transformation, liquid taaking a
gaseous form. And steam is found to consist
of molecules of water. Through disintegration
of the molecule of water are discovered
the atoms of the original gases,
Hydrogen and Oxygen, the combination of
which, in a certain chemical proportion
(H2o) formed that molecule. Now an atom
92
is such a small particle of Matter that it
requires about 500 millions of them placed
side by side to cover a linear inch. in breaking
up the atom are finally found electrons.
The electron is the smallest division of
Matter which Science has been able to
obtain for the time being. The size of an
electron compared to that of an atom is as
our Earth in comparison with the whole
Solar System. What is an electron? An
electron is a tiny sphere which is rotating
with extraordinary velocity on its own axis,
and then revolving at a speed of about 10,000
miles per second around another microscopic
sphere which acts as a central sun. They
are kept in that relation by the Universal
Law of Attraction, just like our planetary
system in particular and like the Universe
in general. It is, on a small scale, what we
see there on a large scale. There are positive
and negative electrons. The negative electrons
are revolving around a central positive
electron. It is the aggregation of these
electrons in their revolutions around the
central electron which constitutes the atom;
and the relation of those electrons one to
another, and their number in the atom of the
analyzed element, determines its nature.
The greater the number of electrons in an
atom of Matter the stronger and heavier is
the material element. The Hydrogen atom,
because it consists of one positive electron
around which is revolving one negative
electron, is accepted by the scientists of
93
today as the standard atomic weight, this
weight being taken as I. The analysis of the
nature of the electron shows it to be radioactive,
continually releasing Energy. Why?
Because ENERGY IS THE BASIS OF THE
EIIEGTRON. In other words the electron
is made of condensed Energy. Energy is
Force. Then what conclusion can be drawn?
That the so-called material things are but
condensed Forces, which are the most
immaterial things that one can imagine.
Material Science was therefore able, through
investigation, to prove the absolute nonexistence
of Matter AS MATTER, in the
generally accepted meaning of that word.
It showed that everything is but Forces of
different rates of vibration, in various combinations
and relations one to another, and in
different degrees of condensation. This
evidence is so convincing, because it is
scientific and it can be proven. It works
invariably.
For example, the diamond is supposed
to be the hardest stone known on Earth.
Its hardness is standard; it is ten. Next
comes the Corundum (Ruby, Sapphire); its
hardness is nine. They are both precious
stones because they are made of a great deal
of condensed Energy. Sandstone has only
the hardness of about three. Now if the
amount of Energy contained in the diamond
were released, it would be found to exceed
the amount of Energy contained in the same
volume of sandstone in exact proportion as
94
the hardness of the diamond exceeds that
of sandstone. According to calculations
made by some modern Scientists, calculations
based on scientific experiments, there
is enough Energy condensed in one ounce
of Matter, which, if suddenly released,
would lift all the German ships sunk during
the Great War from the bottom of the sea
to the top of Mt. Everest, the highest
mountain on Earth. Also, each human being
has in his little finger enough condensed
Force to run for several minutes all the trains
in England, representing many thousands
of horsepower. This shows what tremendous
powers and forces are latent in us, waiting
to be manifested and to be made proper use
of.
There are some metals which are called
precious, and others which are called common.
This is again the same thing. Precious
metals are precious because they have so
much condensed Energy within them that
they can resist the disintegrating influence
of the air. Gold is one of the metals which
possesses this power. Common metals,
because they have in themselves less condensed
Energy, cannot resist those influences
as easily as Gold, Platinum, Iridium, Palladium
and other precious metals, and they
oxidize-that is, disintegrate, die. The
amount of condensed Energy in an element
determines its preciousness, its real value.
A diamond is precious not only because it is
beautiful and rare, but especially because it
95
has a real value from the point of view of its
absolute superiority over other elements, on
account of the greater presence of forces in it.
And as it is with precious stones and metals,
so it is with human beings. Those individuals
who are called noble because of their
noble character really express their life
forces on a higher plane, in stronger, higher
vibrations than others, and are therefore
more powerful, and consequently more
valuable to Humanity. The word "noble" in
this instance is used in the sense of soul
qualities and not as class distinction. It is
evident that such investigations by Material
Science explain Matter completely. Humanity
owes that to the perseverance of the
material scientists who were not afraid to
use their own material means in order to
disintegrate the very elements on . which
they were working. When one knows the
laws which govern the so-called material
phenomena, the present concept of Matter
is done away with entirely. That is because
of the Law and not because of one's affirmation
that there is no Matter. The negation
of Matter will not destroy Matter. That
is. why the success of mental healing does
not depend on the negation of Matter, but
on something entirely different. There are
laws which are put in operation most of the
time absolutely unconsciously by those who
think that they bring forth results because
they denied Matter. For example, let us
take electric light. One can for a thousand
96
years deny that it is shining, and still it will
shine. But if one knows that there is a
switch, that switch can be turned off and
the light will not shine any more and it will
be dark. There the Physical Law was made
proper use of and it did work to obtain the
desired result.
The following scientific definition of
Matter will clearly show what Matter really
is:
WHAT IS CALLED MATTER IS BUT THE
CONSCIOUSNESS OF EFFECTS PRODUCED
ON THE SENSES BY VARIOUS MANIFESTA-
TIONS OF PRIMAL ENERGY. THEREFORE
MATTER IS ONLY A STATE OF CONSCIOUS-
NESS, THE PRESENT MANNER IN WHICH
THOSE EFFECTS ARE PERCEIVED.
This proposition explains Matter completely.
What then do we feel, what do we
see, what do we perceive with our senses?
Energy, forces, nothing but forces. Vibratory
waves of Energy striking the senses
produce certain impressions and those impressions
we call sensations. When we
have one kind of vibrations we feel it as
touch, another kind we see, another we
hear, another we smell, or another we taste.
We say we perceive the thing materially,
but in reality there is nothing material about
it; it is all vibration.
The question may be asked, how has the
electron originated, and why is it a sphere?
Primal Universal Energy has two fundamental
qualities, Motion and Attraction.
97
Motion in its turn expresses itself in two
distinct kinds of movement, one the rotary
(centripetal) movement, the other, the
propulsory (centrifugal) movement. That
is seen throughout the whole Universe,
therefore also in our own solar system. There
is this planet, the Earth, rotating on its own
axis and moving continually forward, but
by the Sun's attraction kept circling around
it. The rotary movement is expressed in
the rotation of the Earth on its own axis.
The forward movement is seen in the Earth's
revolutions about the Sun. On a larger
scale, our whole solar system turns around
itself, and besides that moves forward at
the speed of about 1,000,000 miles per 24
hours towards the constellation of Lyra. It
moves in a seemingly straight line, but in
reality not in a straight line; it revolves
around a central sun which has not yet been
discovered by the astronomers, because it is
so far away. There is no end to those ever
increasing orbits, because the Universe is
endless. And when we come down to the
smallest things we find the same Law governing
them. The electrons of which the atom
is constituted, rotating on their own little
axes, express the first movement of Primal
Energy, and in revolving around their tiny
sun they express the second movement.
Now the first rotary movement is a condensary
one. When individual units of vibrations
of Primal Energy begin to rotate
around their own little axes, their inherent
98
quality of Attraction makes them condense
into electrons. These electrons take the form
of. spheres, because a sphere is a perfectly
balanced body, which can remain in that
condition indefinitely, as all its constituent
parts are in perfect relation one to another.
For that reason physical bodies, in order to
persevere in existence, take in Nature that
simple and lasting form.
On that principle is built the whole
Universe. Out of a nebula which began to
move and condense and revolve around its
own axis, was formed this solar System. All
other systems were formed in the same way;
and the little atom and electron are formed
according to the same law, because there is
only One Universal Law, called the Great
Law which pervades and governs everything
in the same way, no matter if it is a
star or if it is an electron. The electrons
originated because of that first movement,
the rotary condensary movement of Primal
Energy. These Laws pervade everything
and are continually operating also in our
own bodies, and the knowledge of them
enables us to work out problems in our
life with mathematical accuracy.
Our body is an aggregation of forces in
different degrees of condensation; therefore
it is a Dynamic Center, of which we are the
rightful master.
99
THE VISIBLE UNIVERSE IS MADE UP
OF INVISIBLE, PRIMAL, ENERGY. THAT
WHICH IS SEEN IS MADE UP OF THINGS
UNSEEN.
Almost everybody knows something about
explosives. They are a very good illustration
of how seemingly solid material things
are in reality made of immaterial elements.
Take a piece of dynamite. It is hard, has
weight and density, etc. in striking that
piece of dynamite, energy is used and produces
certain vibrations which alter the
relations of the atoms within so that the
dynamite explodes-that is, some Energy is
released and we have dynamite trans..
formed into gases. It is a chemical reaction
which takes place by shock. There is no
need to pour any chemical on the dynamite
in order to produce an explosion. To strike
-that is, to use energy is sufficiient.
Energy makes the reaction. And what is
obtained from that reaction? Perhaps thousands
of times the volume of the original
piece of dynamite. It is obtained in gases.
It has entirely changed. Compared with
the first thing which was handled, it is
seemingly very immaterial. Of course the
gases are also "material," as one can weigh
gases, smell them, etc., yet there is already
a tremendous change. That shows how
Matter, when handled in a certain way,
entirely changes its aspect and becomes a
different thing, so that when it reaches its
last hiding place in Energy, no one can call
100
it "material" any more; it is then PURE
FORCE.
Everything in this seemingly material
Universe is but a combination of Forces, in
condensed and non-condensed conditions.
In other words, the whole Universe is but
an Infinite, Dynamic Center, which is, on a
tremendous scale, the same as our bodies
are on a small scale.
THE GREAT LAW OF ATTRACTION
GOVERNS THE WHOLE UNIVERSE AND IS
THE BASIS OF ETERNAL HARMONY.
When analyzing Primal Energy, it was
explained that it has a basic quality,
Attraction, and that this quality of Attraction
makes possible the existence of the whole
Universe, as everything in this Universe
is kept in perfect relation through the
Law of Attraction. Attraction and Love
are synonymous; Love is the emotional name
for Attraction. Because of the Law of
Attraction, all the minute particles in everything
are holding together and make up a
whole. Why have we a body which we can
touch and which has a form? Because of the
Law & Attraction, which is keeping the cells
together. The same is true of stone or of
anything else. Why do we remain on the
surface of the Earth and are not thrown into
Space during its rotation around its axis?
Because of the Law of Attraction. Why does
101
the Earth revolve around the Sun? Because
of the Law of Attraction. Without it, the
Earth would be lost in Infinite Space. Why
do all the celestial bodies move in such a
harmonious way? Because of the Law of
Attraction. This Law of Attraction is a
Basic Law, a Fundamental Quality of
Primal Energy; and here we have an explanation
of the words in the Bible: "In Him we
live and move and have our being." As it
was previously stated, ATTRACTION AND
LOVE ARE SYNONYMOUS. When we love
we are attracted; when we hate we are
repelled. It is the Law of Attraction which
enables Universal Harmony to remain
Harmony, because without Attraction,
everything would become chaos, and the
Universe would collapse. It is that Sustaining
Power referred to in the explanation of
the word "Principle" which makes it possible
for the Universe to be eternally existing.
SPACE WHICH SEPERATES THE WORLDS
ONE PROM ANOTHER DOES NOT ISOLATE
THEM. THEY ARE RENT IN PERPETUAL,
COMMUNICATION ONE WITH ANOTHER
THROUGH THE GREAT LAW OF ATTRAC-
TION WHICH IS EXERCISED INSTANTANE-
OUSLY AND ETERNALLY THROUGHOUT
ALL SPACE AND THIS FORMS INDISSOL-
UBLE LINKS BETWEEN THE WORLDS.
First must be explained the difference
102
between the word "WORLD" and the word
"UNIVERSE," for there is a great difference
between these two words. THERE IS BUT
ONE UNIVERSE. the word itself states it.
This one UNIVERSE is made up of infinite
numbers of Worlds.
What is called by astronomers a World is
all that which can be seen through the telescope,
and even much more than what can
be actually perceived. All the seemingly infinite
agglomeration of stars, suns, and planets
extending in all directions-some of
these stars being so far away from the
Earth that their light takes millions of
years to reach us, although light speeds
through Space at a rate of about 186,000
miles per second-constitutes this World.
Many stars do not exist any more, yet we see
them because their light is reaching us only
now. It is impossible, in our present mental
development, to realize the stupendous
size of this World. Yet what we see around
us, seemingly infinite as it appears to be,
IS FINITE AND HAS AN END; and when we
come to what we would call the limit of
this World, we would see the following
picture. On one side myriads and myriads
of stars, the Milky Way, beautiful combinations
of lights, etc., which, all taken
together, would appear as an infinitely large
Sphere; and on the other side, utter darkness,
darkness so complete, so terrible, that
here on Earth we could have no idea of it.
It seems to be void of everything, dead; and
103
if we would travel through that darkness,
where not a star is shining, even no vibration
of the Ether perceptible, for a seemingly
endless time and through immeasurable
space, we would again come to another
World, to a different agglomeration of what
would appear to he another infinite number
of stars and suns and planets.
That would be another World; and that
World, taken as a whole, is again a Sphere, a
gigantic Sphere floating in that Endless
Ocean of seeming Voidness, seeming Darkness;
and that Endless Ocean, which has NO
LIMIT, with those floating Spheres in it,
which are the Worlds, THAT IS THE
UNIVERSE; and that UNIVERSE, BOIJND-
LESSINFINITE, IS TI-JE ONLY CHILD,
THE ONLY SON EVER BORN OF THE ONE
GOD, OF THE ONE GREAT PRINCIPLE,TIIE
ABSOLUTE. When we visualize Divinity
from the point of view even of Astronomy
we have such a gigantic, overwhelming concept
of what the Great Principle is that all
religious ideas of It are nothing but pale,
limited thoughts, because they can never
give us, as Science does, that wonderful
proof of the greatness of God, that Great
One, called the Absolute, who is our Father.
Our Earth is a beautiful star floating in
that Infinite Ocean, the Universe. The Law
of Attraction, a BASIC LAW OF UNIVERSAL
ENERGY, PERVADES THE WHOLE
UNIVERSE. Even in that Void Space, where
there is seemingly nothing, where even the
104
visible light vibrations cannot penetrate
because they are too dense and are therefore
circumscribed to their respective Worlds,
there the Law of Attraction, of Love, is still
operating. That Law cannot be avoided;
there is nowhere-e in the Universe a place
where Attraction, or Love, does not exist;
and Love is an Aspect of Divinity, the highest
we know of now. These scientific statements
correspond exactly to the words of the
Psalmist: IF I ASCEND UP INTO HEAVEN,
THOU ART THERE; IP I MAKE MY BED IN
HELL, BEHOLD THOU ART THERE; IF I
TAKE THE WINGS OF THE MORNING, AND
DWELL IN THE UTTERMOST PA.RTS OF
THE SEA, EVEN THERE SHALL THY HAND
LEAD ME, AND THY RIGHT HAND SHALL
HOLD ME."
The Law of Love, the Law of Attraction,
pervades the seeming voidness of interstellar
space and is exercised instantaneously
and eternally, because Time and Space do
not exist for that Law. It is just as infinite
as Infinity and Eternity. And the Law of
Attraction is the great bond of Love uniting
the Worlds, the bond which Humanity has
always consciously or unconsciously recognized,
because it is a Universal Law. Why
do human beings congregate and form
communities, cities, countries and nations?
Why is it that we like to league ourselves
together, to have brotherhoods, societies,
unions? Because of that Law. All the
Worlds and all the Stars are brothers; so are
105
we all brothers; and if the Worlds are placed
in that relation one to another, and the Law
of Attraction is functioning so perfectly
there, why should it not be also consciously
exercised among us human beings? That
would be THE FULFILLING OF THE LAW OF
LOVE, OUR ETERNAL PRIVILEGE AND
DUTY. Scientists now realize the infinite possibilities
opened by that Law of Attraction,
and they try to Communicate, through vibrations,
with the different planets, because
they know that vibrations will reach anywhere,
These are the indissoluble links
between the Worlds, formed by the Vibrations
of Attraction, the Basis of Universal
Harmony. Therefore, these Worlds, these
Stars and Planets, which seem to be isolated,
are in reality not isolated, and form One
Great, Perfect, Eternal Whole. They are
no more isolated one from another than are
the cells in our bodies. ALL IS COMPLETE
UNITY, AND WE OURSELVES ARE ALSO
NOT SEPARATE BODIES AS WE APPEAR TO
BE; WE ARE PARTS OF THE ONE GREAT
UNIVERSAL BODY, UNITED, AND HELD
TOGETHER BY THE LAW OF ATTRACTION.
ENERGY IS INDESTRUCTIBLE, THERE-
FOR ETERNAL. SUBSTANCE IS IN-
DESTRUCTIBLE, THEREFORE ETERNAL.
THE UNIVERSE IS INDESTRUCTIBLE,
106
THEREFORE ETERNAL. THE SOUL IS
INDESTRUCTIBLE, THEREFORE ETERNAL.
ENERGY IS INDESTRUCTIBLE, THERE-
FORE ETERNAL. Primal Energy, being the
basis of everything, is indestructible. That
was explained in the First Lesson. It cannot
disperse itself anywhere because it pervades
Infinite Space, is One with it. There is
nothing which can destroy it because it is
all there is, and once it is indestructible, it
must be eternal because it must remain in
that condition forever. It has always existed
and always will be existing.
SUBSTANCE IS INDESTRUCTIBLE,
THEREFORE ETERNAL. What is Substance?
What is the difference between Substance and
Matter? Substance and Matter are two very
different things. Matter is a phenomenon, a
condition of continual changes, elusive, mutable.
Substance is, on the contrary, a noumenon,
something stable, permanent. The word
Substance itself expresses it. It means
something which underlies, stands under as a
foundation, from the Latin word "Sub-
stare"-to stand under, support. Substance
is the first condensation of Primal
Energy, due to its rotary movement. There
is the free Energy and the so-called condensed
Energy, and from the combination
of these two is formed everything which
exists. Substance being made of an indestructible,
eternal element, Primal Energy
107
is just as indestructible and eternal as the
latter.
First there is the Unmanifest, the Causeless
Cause, the Great Principle, the Absolute
called God. Its first manifestation is Primal
Energy. Primal Energy becomes in turn a
cause by itself. Its direct manifestation is
Substance, which is the underlying basic
element from which the whole Universe is
made. Substance is therefore universal.
Being a noumenon, it is immutable, but
expresses itself in infinitely varied and continually
changing phenomena.
THE UNIVERSE IS INDESTRUCTIBLE,
THEREFORE ETERNAL. The Universe is
an infinite and eternal structure, conceived
in the creative imagination of its great Architect,
Cosmic Intelligence, reared out of Substance
through the agency of Free Energy,
and indissoluble cemented by the immutable
Law of Attraction. All these elements which
contribute to its existence being indestructible,
the Universe itself is indestructible,
therefore eternal.
THE SOUL IS INDESTRUCTIBLE, THERE-
FORE ETERNAL. Finally we have the Soul,
indestructible, therefore eternal. At first
the question may arise, "What is a Soul?
Is there a Soul and can it be proven that
there is a Soul?" It can-by logical deductions.
What is A SOUL? THE SOULS OF
EVERYTHING, BE IT MAN, ANIMAL,
108
PLANT, MINERAL, OR GAS, ARE THOSE
SELF-PROJECTIONS INTO SUBSTANCE OF
THE UNMANIFEST, ETERMALLY PROCEED-
ING FROM THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THE
ABSOLUTE, RANGES FROM THE MOST
SIMPLE TO THE MOST COMPLEX, AND
CULMINATING IN THOSE INDIVIUAL-
IZED, CONSCIOUS, COMPOUND PROJEC-
TIONS CALLED MEN.
The Soul creates channels through which
to express its activities. These channels
have certain definite forms, and an aggregation
of them is called a body. The plane on
which the Soul is functioning, be it the
physical, the mental or the Spiritual,
determines the appearance of the body and
the elements of which it is formed. In other
words, the body is the direct result, the
proof, of the Soul's existence. But the body
dies. What then happens to the Soul?
Does the Soul also disintegrate, die? No!
The body is nothing but an effect, the Soul
being the cause; therefore the destruction
of the effect can in no way impair the cause.
One body destroyed, the Soul builds up
another body, always of a stronger, better
material, until it reaches a stage where its
body is made of indestructible elements.
Such a body becomes then eternal, because it
is indestructible.
Therefore the death of the body does not
mean the annihilation of the Soul, for the
Soul cannot die, nor can it ever be lost.
But the sense of' the Soul can be lost, and
109
when that sense of the Soul is lost, then
happens what is called in the Apocalypse,
THE SECOND DEATH, which means that
the unit called a Soul is thrown back into
the very deepest plane of Involution, from
where it has to start all over again the
millions of years of experience until it
reaches once more the stage in which it lost
the sense of its own existence. Each one of
us, in our present state of Evolution, is the
product of millions and millions of years of
hard, very hard work. We have been through
such experiences that if most of us could
consciously remember our past, it would
become one of the greatest curses Humanity
could have, because we would be so weighed
down by the remembrance of these experiences.
Fortunately we have it now behind
us. Divine Wisdom has covered that sad
past with a veil of forgetfulness. Otherwise,
life on Earth with all its efforts, aims and
endeavors, would become almost impossible,
on account of remorse for that past. In
each successive incarnation, it is given
to men to start their lives anew.
THE SOUL IS INDIVIDUAL. WE HAVE
A GREAT NUMBER OF PERSONALITIES
WITHIN OURSELVES AS REMNANTS OF
PAST INCARNATIONS, BUT WE HAVE
ONLY ONE INDIVIDUALITY, the individual
being compared to the note in music or the
number in mathematics. That is our individuality,
OUR ETERNAL IDENTITY. MAN IS
INDIVIDUAL. Personality is but the human
110
concept which we have for the time being of
our own self, and our present personality is
made up of many personalities.
THE BASIS OF MAN'S EXISTENCE AND
IDENTITY IS THE SOUL,. THE BODY IS
BUT A TRANSITOPY CONDITION OR EX-
PRESSION OF THE SOUL'S PRESENT ACTIVI-
TIES, THEREFORE, AS THE ACTIVITIES
OF THE SOUL CHANGE, SO DOES THE
BODY CHANGE ALSO.
In this proposition we have something
basic, fundamental the Soul; that is, the
direct emanation of the Great Principle,
the Absolute, of Divinity, conscious and
perfect in every way, Its image and likeness.
The question may be asked, "Is there an
infinite number of souls?" Yes, 'there is.
Because, even if each soul manifests the
completeness of the Absolute, the perfect
image and likeness of which is represented in
it, the Infinity of the Great All can only
be represented by infinite number of souls
that make up that Great All, as in their
infinite number, they stand for the Infinity of
the Absolute. Each soul is identical with
Divinity in quality, not in quantity; but
taken all together, they are identical with
the Great Principle also in quantity, and
thus constitute the Great Compound Soul of
the Universe. It is a Law which is continually
expressing itself in Nature. For
111
instance, take a solution of salt, or any other
crystallized chemical, and when that solution
is saturated and crystallization begins, it
crystallizes in thousands and thousands of
small crystals. What is the Law hack of it?
The solution is full of energy, manifested in
vibrations going in different directions.
There are a great many of those vibrations,
each unit of which individually expresses
itself through the chemical elements in the
form of a small crystal, all the crystals
together representing the quantity of the
solution, and each crystal having also all the
qualities of that solution. Nature works in
this way, and Nature always expresses
itself exactly according to Universal Laws,
manifested in that ordinary experiment
with the solution of any salt. The same Law
also governs the relation of souls to their
Primary Cause, the Great Principle.
The Soul, therefore, is THAT WHICH
STANDS AS THE BASIS OF OUTEXISTENCE,
of our life, of our identity and individuality.
Individuality is in the soul. Each soul has
from Eternity its own fixed identity which
no other soul can have. Never two souls
alike, never two lives alike. Each has its
own place' in the Universe. When the Soul
has found that place, it will keep it for
Eternity. That is why the basis of man's
existence and identity is the Soul.
What is the body? The Soul acts. Its
qualities, its forces, are expressing themselves
through its activities, and the aggre112
gate manifestations of those activities, outwardly
outlined, form a body. Body does
not mean only a material form; it may be a
mental, a Spiritual body. It depends on the
plane on which the Soul expresses its
activities. What do the eyes stand for?
They stand for perception. We perceive,
we see through the eyes. What do the ears
express? They express discrimination. Each
part of our body expresses a certain activity
of the Soul-the heart, emotion; the brain,
capacity to think, to coordinate, or the
governing power; the shoulders, power to
bear responsibilities; the feet, the foundations
on which we stand; the legs, the power
to move forward, to advance; the hands, the
power to act, etc. The body is but a transitory
condition or expression of the Soul's
present activities. When the activities of
the Soul change, the body also will be modified
according to the changed activities of
the Soul. Human beings of today are said
to belong to the Fifth Race. Its emblem is
the Pentagram-the five pointed star. That
is why we are now expressing, manifesting,
the number Five. We have five fingers,
five senses, etc. The previous Race, in
whom the activities of the Soul were less
developed, were supposed to have only four
senses, perhaps only four fingers. Four
was their dominant number. The next
Race, the Sixth Race, will have six senses; it
will manifest, express the number Six.
Their bodies will be modified according to
113
their souls' activities. Its emblem will be
the six pointed star,-the Star of Wisdom
where the two principles, the male and
female, combine in one.
It is a scientific fact that the body is
renewed periodically. Every seven years
(some authorities say three, others every
year) each part is made new-tissues,
bones, etc. Why is there this divergence of
opinions? Because some individuals whose
vibrations are slow renew their bodies
slowly. Those whose vibrations are rapid
renew them quickly. Their vibrations are
higher and therefore their change is much
quicker. They can renew in three, perhaps
in two years, or even in one year. That
renewal is all due to the activities of the Soul.
In that first proposition the material body,
our present body, does not enter yet, as a
separate concept. It refers in general to
"a body." WE SHALL ALWAYS HAVE
SOME KIND OF A BODY. THE SOUL MUST
HAVE A BODY, because that is the outward
manifestation of its inner qualities. What
form the body will take we do not know
now, but it certainly will have a form and
always a more and more beautiful, a more
advanced form. Everything has a form;
form is a quality of the Soul; therefore bodies
will always have some form. On the higher
planes, where the activities of the Soul have
finer elements through which to express
themselves, the bodies continually change
in their appearance. Those whose eyes are
114
trained to perceive the life vibrations of the
body, called the Aura, know that the color
and the force of the Aura change all the time.
When we have one kind of thought or emotion
the Aura is one color; with another kind,
another color; all due to the activities of the
Soul.
THE SOUL OF MAN, OR THE REAL SELF,
WHICH IS MAN, IS A COMPOUND, INDIVID-
UALIZED, SELF-CONSCIOUS, PROJECTION
OF HARMONIOUS VIBRATIONS, PROCEED-
ING FROM THE INFINITE SOURCE OF ALL
ENERGY AND BEING THEREFORE ENTER-
NAL,. IN PENETRATING INTO THE MA-
TERIAL, WOULD THE SOUL, ATTRACTS
FROM ITS SURROUNDINGS (AIR, WATER,
EARTH ETC.) ALL THE NECESSARY ELE-
MENTS TO CONSTRUCT A VEHICLE OR
BODY FOR ITS EXPRESSION ON THIS
EARTH PLANE. AFTER IT HAS EXPRESSED
ITSELF ON THE EARTH PLANE FOR A
SUFFICIENT LENGTH OF TIME, THE
GREAT LAW CALLS IT TO PROCEED FUR-
THER TO DO SOME OTHER WORK. THE
SOUL LEAVES THE BODY, WHICH, BEREFT
OF ITS COHESIVE POWER, DISINTEGRATES
AND GIVES BACK TO ITS NATIVE ELE-
MENTS THE MATERIALS OF WHICH IT
HAS BEEN CONSTRUCTED.
115
the manifestation, the ray, of the Absolute,
called also the son of God, and which is an
individualized compound projection of harmonious,
self-conscious vibrations. When
there was given, in the First Lesson, a
definition of what man is, a different wording
was used because it was approached from
the point of view of the Absolute, where
even vibrations were not mentioned as being
a too material concept. But now the same
subject is taken up from the point of view
of the science of vibrations, and in a way
vibrations are very tangible things tangible
as far as their perceptibility is concerned.
The Soul is a compound unit of these vibrations;
that is, all the infinite varieties of
vibrations of the Absolute, focused in an
infinite number of individual points, are
souls-conscious, harmonious, individual
projections of Self-Consciousness, proceeding
from the Infinite Source of all Vibration and
being therefore eternal, because they have
eternally the nature of their Father, the
Great Principle. When these souls, these
aggregated self-conscious vibrations, focused
in individual points, penetrate into this
material world, in order to have a body,
a material vehicle, through which to express
themselves on this plane, they attract (the
force of Attraction being their inherent
quality) around themselves all the different
minute electrons, atoms, and so forth, and
build with those elements a body. That is
done, as we all know, through the mother
116
by means of gestation. The Soul which is to
be incarnated sends its vibrations into the
mother's womb; there it touches, in the
female egg, a unit of the male seed which
had penetrated there; from there the life
begins to unfold and the Soul to express
itself more and more through that little
seed, combining its own activities with
those of the mother, and thus forming little
by little the body which it will call its own.
The mother provides the building material
through breathing, eating, and so forth, and
feeds the body of the future child; and the
Soul continually attracts around its own
activities the material elements provided
by the mother, thus forming its future body.
During that physical union between men
and women, the main object of which is the
conception of another being, some of the
strongest physical, mental, and emotional
vibrations are brought forth. In that moment
is determined what kind of a soul shall
be incarnated in the mother's womb. Like
attracts like. If the vibrations of the two
parents are harmonious and of a high rate, a
highly evolved soul will be attracted. If,
on the contrary, both parties, or even one,
will manifest vibrations of disharmony,
vibrations of a low rate, a soul whose vibrations
correspond to that rate will be thus
attracted. THEREFORE IT IS MOST USSEN-
TIAL THAT THE PROSPECTIVE PARENTS
CONSIDER THAT BODILY UNION AS SOME-
THING VERY SACRED AND PURE, AND
117
THAT THEY PERFORM IT WITH A HIGHER
OBJECT IN MIND THAN THE MERE
GRATIFICATION OF A CARNAL.. APPETITE.
IT MUST BE A GLORIOUS HYMN OF LOVE,
INWHICH EVERY FIBER OF THEIR TRIUNE
BEING, BODY, MIND, AND SOUL, SENDS
OUT ITS MOST PERFECT VIBRATIONS.
No physical union should ever be tolerated
when the two parties are not in complete
harmony with each other at that moment,
else most disastrous effects will descend
upon the child born of such a disharmonious
union.
The Soul which incarnates is not within
the seed; it only overshadows it, combines its
individual life force with that of the seed,
thus making the seed grow and become the
channel for its expression on this Earth
plane. When the nine months of gestation
are over, the body is completely formed and
the child is born and becomes a separate
entity. The Soul then acts through the
child as through a separate, individual
channel, not needing the mother any more.
The Soul expresses through the body of
the child all its functions only when the
child reaches the age of puberty, and is
ready for procreation. When the Soul has
expressed through the body all its functions,
even the function of procreation (which is a
Divine quality, and one of the greatest the
Soul possesses) , then only is it fully equipped
to fulfil properly its mission on this Earth.
The Soul then continually expresses itself
118
through that body, the vehicle built by it
for its own use. The material body is the
instrument, the channel, through which the
Soul contacts the outer world and manifests
itself and is perceptible on this material
plane. When the time comes for the Soul
to go to another plane to work there, it
happens so that through circumstances (the
individual having become sick or old) the
Soul leaves the body; and as soon as it
abandons the body, the latter, being no
longer held together by the cohesive power,
the force of Attraction inherent in the Soul,
begins to disintegrate, to give back to the
elements the materials of which it has been
formed. There are the words of the Bible:
"Dust thou art, and to dust thou shalt
return." Out of dust was the body created,
and to dust does it return. Out of invisible
little particles is formed the material bodysometimes
a very beautiful body-but when
the Soul goes away, that body reverts back
to dust. Thus we see that the body really
returns to its primitive condition of simple
elements. Therefore, when we lose somebody
on this plane, we should never mourn
over the body which was dear to us as thc
visible manifestation of the Soul we loved.
That body is just as outworn as an old suit
of clothes. It may be a remembrance to
us, but it is a worn-out garment, which the
Soul has replaced with another garment
much more beautiful.
We see continually in Nature this chang119
ing of bodies. Let us take the caterpillar as
an example. The caterpillar dies as a caterpillar,
becomes a chrysalis. The soul of the
caterpillar is no longer satisfied to crawl on
the ground; it wants to fly. By and by that
consciousness unfolds in it, and when it has
unfolded itself perfectly, and has created
all the necessary apparatus to be able to fly,
the chrysalis bursts and the butterfly comes
out. That is why the butterfly is considered
the symbol of the Soul which frees itself
from the old body. The Soul, by the successive
putting on and leaving off of its
different bodies, creates more and more perfect
vehicles for its expression, until it
finally reaches a stage where its body
becomes as perfect and indestructible as is
the Soul itself.
When we are born again, we start life
anew. We have within us all our past
experiences, although most of us are not
conscious of it. Even those who are the
most advanced have to work hard for a
number of years in order to become fully
conscious of their own knowledge. It took
Jesus over thirty years before He was able to
unfold within Himself all that was needed
for His divine mission, and yet He knew,
from the very day when He entered this
material plane, that He was to save the
World. Tradition says that He went into
the Ephesian schools to study the Science of
Being. That Scientific study, that period of
inner development, was necessary in order
120
to bring back to Him in His material embodiment
that which He already knew from
Eternity. If we consciously express the
Laws of Harmony now, we shall be able to
prolong our lives, and especially we shall be
able to keep to the very limit of our days a
strong body-a body strong not only in its
activities, but also young and harmonious
in form. If people would live as Jesus did,
they would not need to die. They would
raise their vibrations higher and higher
until finally they would be translated into
another plane, as were Jesus, Elijah, Enoch
and others, thus overcoming the last enemy,
Death. It is not the changing of one body
for another that makes people fear death; it
is the pain connected with it, because most
people suffer terribly when those ties between
Soul and body are severed. It is also an
acute mental agony, especially for those
who love life and yet do not believe in a life
hereafter; and that is why, after all, the
process of dying is such a sad thing. When
our mental attitude towards it will have
changed, then our physical experience of
that transition will also be greatly modified,
and we will not fear it any longer. On the
contrary, the ABSOLUTE CERTAINTY THAT
WE ARE GROWING INTO A BETTER, FINER
BODY, raising us into a higher condition,
will make us almost desire that change
121
THE HUMAN BODY IS A CURRENT CON-
TINUALLY RENEWED BY THE ASSIMILA-
TION OF GASES THROUGH BREATHING,
AND THE FEEDING OF THE MOLECULES,
DIRECTED, ORGANIZED, GOVERNED, BY
THE IMMATERIAL FORCE WHICH ANI-
MATES IT AND WHICH IS CALLED THE
SOUL.
The previous proposition simply gave us
man born, the Soul incarnated, manifesting
itself through a material body. It gave us
the process of that incarnation, the process
of building the body, but it did not say how
it will keep the body, how it will live in that
body. This proposition explains that. It
says the body is a current, which is scientifically
correct. It is a current of vibrations, a
current of Life continually flowing through
us. That vital current which flows through
the nerves, through the bones and through
every cell in the body-that current,
aggregated, outlined, is the body itself; and
that current is kept alive first of all through
breathing, or the assimilation of gases. The
gases feed that current. We usually think
that the feeding of our body by means of
the mouth and through the stomach is the
most important. But this is not so at all.
In the year 1920, the Mayor of Cork,
MacSwiney, showed that he could live a very
long period, approximately seventy-six days,
without eating, yet he could not have lived
five minutes without breathing. That proves
how much more important breathing is than
122
the actual material food. People of today
realize that more and more, and that is why
there are so many different systems of
scientific breathing. Some of them are
exceedingly good. TO BREATHE PROPER-
LY, THAT IS, TO BREATHE SCIENTIFIC-
ALLY, IS ONE OF THE VERY IMPORTANT
THINGS FOR US TO KNOW IN ORDER TO
KEEP STRONG AND HEALTHY; yet, unfortunately,
our knowledge of that is very
limited. Most human beings do not know
at all how to breathe properly. They live
such an artificial life that even that most
essential function of the body is undeveloped.
There are different kinds of systems of
breathing; the best are those which are
evolved in the very country where they are
to be used. That is why the Oriental
systems do not suit so well the Western
people, and vice versa.
There are, throughout the world, a great
number of systems of diet. One of the best,
up to the present, is considered that of
Horace Fletcher, an American. If people
would follow Fletcher's or any similar
system, they would never know what stomach
trouble is, and also there would be no
shortage of food, because he proved scientifically
that people could eat half of what they
eat now and yet be stronger and healthier.
It is only necessary to masticate the food
properly.
The digesting of the food is done first by
the mouth, then by the stomach. When the
123
food is broken to pieces through mastication,
a certain amount of energy is thus liberated,
absorbed by the mucuses of the mouth and
conveyed directly to the brain, which is
therefore the first to receive Life Force in that
liberated condition. The masticated food is
then sent through the alimentary canal to the
stomach, which starts its digestion. In order
to digest the food properly, the stomach
produces gastric juices, whose chemical qualities
are so powerful that they can dissolve
almost anything they come in contact with.
The gastric juices produced by the stomach
are of a different kind for each food. Therefore,
in dietetics, a simple food is always
advisable in larger quantities-more of one
kind and not so many different kinds combined.
For each kind of food we absorb, the
stomach must produce the corresponding
gastric juice. Suppose there is a dish composed
of six or seven ingredients. Then the
stomach has to produce at the same time six
or seven different gastric juices, which
naturally it cannot do, because it can produce
only one kind of juice at a time. Not
being able to solve the problem in a satisfactory
way, it loses its head, and the losing of
the stomach's head means indigestion; therefore,
people who eat very complicated food,
usually discover that in their older days they
can hardly eat any food at all. Those who
live on simple food, on the contrary, even if
they become, very old, still keep their
stomachs in a fine condition to the very end,
124
because they never gave to their stomachs
work which that organ could not do properly.
Fresh, well prepared but simple food, in a
sufficient quantity, especially vegetables and
fruits, well masticated, is all anyone needs to
insure proper digestion. The current of Life
Force is therefore also fed by the chemical
reaction, called the burning process, which
is produced by the digestion of the food.
That is what is meant by the feeding of the
molecules, a work which is all done-the
current directed, properly organized, and
governed by that invisible, immaterial, individualized,
conscious force, which we call
the Soul. Even there, in that material body,
the dominant power is not the visible body,
but that invisible entity which is underlying,
governing and sustaining it-the Soul. It is
all so systematically arranged that it seems
to work automatically. THERE IS NOTHING
MORE WONDERFUL AND BEAUTIFUL ON
THIS EARTH PLANE THAN A PERFECT
HUMAN BODY, THE "TEMPLE OF THE
LIVING GOD," as an Apostle calls it.
THE HUMAN BODY, AS MATERIAL AS IT
MAY APPEAR TO US, IS BUT A HARMOI-
OUS GROUP FORMED BY THE IMMATE-
RIAL FORCES OF THE SOUL.
This last proposition, which closes the
cycle of the body, seems very much like the
first, in which it was stated that the basis
125
of man's existence and identity is the Soul,
and the body is but a transitory condition
or expression of the Soul's present activities.
Those two propositions appear to be alike,
yet they are not. The first one refers to "a
body." It does not state a material body;
it mentions only a body. It could just as
well be a mental body, an astral body, or a
Spiritual body. This last proposition applies
specifically to a material body, which,
material as it may appear to us, is after all
but a harmonious group of cells, of molecules,
of atoms, of electrons, of vibrations,
formed by the immaterial forces of the Soul,
and held together by the Law of Attraction.
The invisible forces of the Soul have moulded
that visible form, that living statue, called
a human body; and these forces are also
permeating it, sustaining it, and are the
very substance of that body. After the
very deepest point of involution has been
reached, where one seems to be at the bottom
of Matter in its densest aspect, the scientific
fact is discovered, that even there it is NOT
THE SO-GALLED MATERIAL BODY WHICH
IS THE GOVERNING POWER, BUT THE
SOUL, which has formed that body through
its own activities. And as the Soul has
formed it, so can the Soul also modify and
change, even now and here, on this material
plane, this body of ours. In other words,
reaching the bottom of matter, we find there
SPIRIT; THAT IS, SPIRIT IS EVERYWHERE.
What applies to the human body also
126
applies to any other body, to the bodies of
animals, plants, minerals and gases. They
are all formed in the same way, according
to the same principle, the same law, as
human bodies. The reason why only the
human Soul and body are mentioned is
because they are the highest in Nature;
therefore, naturally, when one speaks of
the highest, the lesser is also included in it.
Jesus, in His Sermon on the Mount, did not
mention that we should love animals, plants,
and so forth. As far as we know, He very
seldom even referred to them, because He
understood that if we loved Man, the highest,
naturally we would love everything
below. Why then did Buddha teach such
wonderful respect to all Nature? He lived
in a country where animal and plant life
reached an extraordinary development; it
expressed itself in most cases in very beautiful
forms and became a very important
part in the daily life of the people. Buddha
taught His fellow beings to love as their
younger brothers all those entities belonging
to the different kingdoms of Nature, to
respect their lives. Thus He prepared His
followers to love better their own fellow men,
the highest manifestation in Nature. Great
teachings always make the best practical use
of their immediate surroundings, be it of
place or of time. They are always attuned
to the period in which they are given, so as
to make the process of Evolution as easy as
possible. Jesus, when He was giving His
127
teachings, said to His disciples: "Many
things have I to tell you, but you cannot
bear them now." In spite of being continually
with Him, His disciples could not
understand all of His teachings, because
they were not ready. When Krishna, who
lived long before Buddha, came to proclaim
the gospel of Truth, He did not speak about
Nature in the way Buddha spoke; His teachings
remind one much more of those of Jesus.
Why? Because it was again a different
period in which He lived. That period of
Humanity's Evolution required teachings
which appear to be more similar to the
teachings of Jesus than those of Buddha.
The same was with Vishnu. Yet Jesus,
Buddha, Krishna. and Vishnu are One,
because there is only one Savior of the
World, who comes to this Earth at different
periods, under different names, as a different
personality. The Eternal Individuality
back of all those personalities was, is, and
ever will be the same One. Vishnu, Krishna
and Buddha were just as much Saviors of
the World as was Jesus, and as there cannot
be several Saviors, they must all be One
Eternal Savior -- Love Divine.
"FOR THE PROTECTION OF THE GOOD,
FOR THE DESTRUCTION OF EVIL DOERS, I
AM BORN FROM AGE TO AGE," IS THE
MESSAGE OF LOVE TO SUFFERING HUMAN-
ITY.
128
LESSON THREE
1. QUES. What is Matter?
ANS. Matter is certain vibratory
phenomena perceptible through
the senses. It is by Nature
changeable.
2. QUES. What is the origin of Matter?
ANS. Primal Energy is the noumenon,
or basis, from which the phenomenon
called Matter originated.
3. QUES. What is the nature of Matter?
ANS. It is essentially elusive. It is
called the Great Illusion.
4. QUES. What are its aspects?
ANS. Solid, liquid, and gaseous form.
5. QUES. What are its qualities?
ANS. Weight, density, volume.
6. QUES. What is now the smallest known
particle of Matter?
ANS. The electron.
7. QUES. How many kinds of electrons are
there?
ANS. Two, the positive (male) and the
negative (female) electrons.
8. QUES. What is an electron.?
ANS. An electron is a tiny sphere,
rotating On its own axis, and
made of pure, condensed Primal
Energy.
9. QUES. How is an electron formed?
ANS. Individual units of vibrations of
Primal Energy, in rotating around
their own axes, become condensed
129
and form a microscopical sphere
called an electron.
10. QUES. What is an atom?
ANS. An aggregation of electrons, a
planetary system in miniature.
11. QUES. What is taken as the unit ofatomic weight?
ANS. An atom of Hydrogen, which has
only two electrons, a positive one
around which revolves a negative.
12. QUES. What is a molecule?
ANS. It is an aggregation of atoms.
Molecules constitute all material
elements.
13. QUES. What determines the weight and
the hardness of a material element?
ANS. The number of electrons in an
atom of it. In other words, the
amount of condensed Energy
determines the qualities of the
element.
14. QUES. What other quality does Matterpossess?
ANS. It is radio-active. It emanates
Primal Energy.
15. QUES. What is the cause of radio-
activity?
ANS. The disintegration of Matter, the
release of Primal Energy contained
in it.
16. QUES. Are all material elements radioactive?
ANS. Yes.
130
17. QUES. Which is the most radio-active so
far as is known now?
ANS. Radium.
18. QUES. What determines the preciousness
of an element?
ANS. The amount of condensed Energy
contained in it.
19. QUES. What is the difference between anoble individual and a common
one?
ANS. An individual of noble character
expresses his energies on a higher
plane, in stronger, higher vibrations
than others, and is consequently
of more value to Humanty.
20. QUES. What is the scientific definition of
Matter?
ANS. Matter is but the consciousness of
effects produced on the senses by
various manifestations of Primal
Energy. Therefore Matter is only
a state of consciousness, the
present manner in which those
effects are perceived.
21. QUES. What is the human body?
ANS. It is an aggregation of vibrations
in different degrees of condensation.
It is a dynamic center.
22. QUES. On what principle is the Universebuilt?
ANS. On the same principle as is
formed the electron-through
condensation of Primal Energy.
131
23. QUES. What is the basis of the visible
Universe?
ANS. Invisible, Primal Energy.
24. QUES. What is the Fundamental Law
of' the Universe?
ANS. The Great Law of Attraction
which governs the whole Universe
and is the basis of Eternal
Harmony.
25. QUES. Are the words "Attraction" and"Love" synonymous?
ANS. They are. Attraction is the scientific
name for Love.
26. QUES. What is the connecting linkbetween the component parts of
the Universe (worlds, planets,
etc.)?
ANS. The Great Law of Attraction,
which is exercised instantaneously
and eternally throughout all
Space.
27. QUES. What is the difference betweenthe word "World" and the word
"Universe"?
ANS. There is but one limitless and
eternal Universe, which is made
up of an infinite number of
Worlds.
28. QUES. What is our Earth?
ANS. A beautiful star, floating in that
infinite Universe.
29. QUES. What is Man's eternal privilege
and duty?
ANS. The fulfilling of the Law of Love.
132
30. QUES. Why is Primal Energy indestructible?
ANS. Because it is the effect of an
indestructible Cause, the Great
Principle Itself.
31. QUES. What is Substance, and why is itindestructible?
ANS. Substance is the first condensation
of Primal Energy. Being
made of an indestructible element,
Primal Energy, it is also
indestructible.
32. QUES. Why is the Universe indestruct-
ible?
ANS. Because its basic elements, Primal
Energy, Substance, Cosmic Intelligence
and the Law of Attraction
are indestructible.
33. QUES. What is the Soul, and why is itindestructible?
ANS. Souls are individualized selfprojections
of the Unmanifest
into Substance. They are eternal
because they are the manifestations
of the Great Principle Itself,
34. QUES. Is the Soul individual?
ANS. Yes.
35. QUES. What is the difference between"Individuality" and "Personal-
ANS. Individuality is man's eternal
identity. Personality is but a
transitory human concept of that
Individuality.
133
36. QUES. What is the basis of man's
existence and identity?
ANS. The Soul.
37. QUES. What is the body?
ANS. The body is the aggregated manifestations
of the Soul's activities,
outwardly outlined.
38. QUES. Does the body change?
ANS. Yes. The body is modified to
conform to the changing activities
of the Soul.
39. QUES. How often is the body renewed?
ANS. Every one to seven years, according
to the individual.
40. QUES. Shall we always have some kind
of a body?
ANS. Yes, because the body is the
proof of the existence of the Soul.
41. QUES. Has the Soul only a material
body?
ANS. No. It evolves bodies corresponding
to its different stages of
evolution.
42. QUES. What is the difference betweenthe Soul of Man (his real self),
and Man himself?
ANS. None.
43. QUES. How does the Soul incarnateitself on the material plane?
ANS. It attracts from its surroundings
(air, water, earth, etc.), all the
elements necessary to construct
a vehicle, or body, for its expression
on this earth plane.
134
44. QUES. Through what medium does that
incarnation take place?
ANS. Through the human mother, by
the process of gestation.
45. QUES. What attracts the Soul which isto be incarnated?
ANS. The extraordinarily strong vibrations
projected by the parents
during their physical union.
46. QUES. Why is it important that such
physical union should be something
sacred, inspired by the
highest emotions?
ANS. Because of its immediate effect
on the Soul to be incarnated.
47. QUES. Is the Soul which incarnates con-
tained in the seed?
ANS. No. It only overshadows it.
48. QUES. When does the Soul express all itsfunctions through the body of
the child?
ANS. When the child reaches the age of
puberty, and is ready for procreation.
49. QUES. Is procreation a quality of Matter
or of Spirit?
ANS. Of Spirit.
50. QUES. Why does the body die?
ANS. Because the Soul withdraws from
it, being attracted to a different
plane, where it will have to do
some other work.
51. QUES. What becomes of the body?
ANS. It disintegrates, being bereft of
135
its cohesive power which resides
in the Soul and returns to its
native elements, out of which it
has been formed.
52. QUES. Explain the statement, "Dust
thou art, and to dust thou shalt
return.”
ANS. According to material science, it
is the history of Matter itself.
53. QUES. Is the Soul re-incarnated again?
ANS. Yes, in order to learn its lessons.
54. QUES. Will Reincarnation ever stop?
ANS. Yes, when the Soul has learned
all its lessons, and will have
realized its eternal Spiritual
Status and its oneness with the
Great Principle. There is no
Reincarnation on the Spiritual
Plane.
55. QUES. What is the human body?
ANS. It is a current continually
renewed by the assimilation of
gases through breathing, and
the feeding of the molecules.
56. QUES. Which is first in importance,
breathing or eating?
ANS. Breathing.
57. QUES. What are the advantages' of
scientific, rhythmic breathing?
ANS. It invigorates and purifies the
body, and stimulates all its
activities.
58. QUES. Why should food be properlymasticated?
136
ANS. In order, first, to release the
Primal Energy by breaking up
the atoms of the food, and second,
to transform the food being
masticated into a homogeneous
mass which will simplify the
work of digestion for the stomach.
59. QUES. Why is the simple food preferable
to the complicated?
ANS. Because the simple food, even if
of coarse quality, and taken in
large quantities, is more easily
digested by the stomach than a
complicated food.
60. QUES. What is the invisible powerwhich is directing, organizing and
governing all activities of the
human body?
ANS. The Soul.
61. QUES. Is the human body material?
ANS. No. It is only a harmonious
group of condensed vibrations,
formed by the immaterial forces
of the Soul, and held together
by the Law of Attraction.
62. QUES. When one has reached the densestaspect of Matter, the .bottom of
Involution, what does one discover?
ANS. That Spirit, the most immaterial
thing that we know of, is at the
bottom of it. As Spirit is also
at the top of Matter, the logical
137
conclusion to be drawn is that
Spirit is EVERYWHERE.
63. QUES. Do those propositions concerningthe human Soul and body apply
also to the souls and bodies of
animals, plants, minerals, etc.?
ANS. Yes.
64. QUES. Why did Buddha teach such greatlove for Nature?
ANS. Because he knew that everything
in Nature is a manifestation of
the Great Principle, and is therefore
closely related to Man.
65. QUES. Why did Jesus, in His teachings,
scarcely ever refer to Nature?
ANS. Because if human beings will
love their fellow men, they
cannot help but love Nature
also. Who can do more can do
less.
66. QUES. What is the message of Love to
suffering Humanity?
ANS. "For the protection of the good,
for the destruction of evil-doers,
I am born from Age to Age."
138
139
140
IFE Encrgy, when expressing
itself through the human body
as individualized life, vibrates,
or radiates, from that body
in what is called a Human
Atmosphere or Aura. That radio-activity
does not only belong to human beings.
Animals, plants, minerals, and even gases,
possess also their own radio-activity. In
other words, everything there is, has an
Aura, a luminous atmosphere, surrounding
it, and there are infinite varieties of Auras,
due to the different kinds of Magnetic
Vibrations. Auras of all bodies are formed
in the same way, yet the Aura of the human
body is the most interesting for investiga141
tion, because it presents the greatest number
of varieties. The human Auras vary according
to the sex, state of health, and age of
the individuals, and also according to their
physical, mental, and emotional development.
There are no two Auras alike. As a
general rule, women have a more pronounced
and larger Aura than men. The human Aura
consists of three distinct strata. The first,
the invisible stratum, which surrounds the
body like a band about half an inch thick, is
called the Etheric Double. Out of that
Etheric Double emanates the second stratum
of the Aura, called the Inner Aura. It is of
a misty appearance, like a delicate vapor
surrounding the body. It is usually about
two inches thick. Both strata, the Inner
Aura and the Etheric Double, preserve a
uniform thickness all over the body, following
its contours. Surrounding the Inner
Aura, and emanating from it, is the third
stratum of the Human Atmosphere, called
the Outer Aura. That Outer Aura has the
appearance of rays which contact the outside
atmosphere. Through those rays Life
Energy both pours out of the body into
Space, and pours into the body from Space.
There is a continual coming in and going out
of Life Force through those Auric Rays.
When the contact is established between the
life force within the human body, and the
Universal Life Energy outside it, it is
through those Auric Rays that the Life
Energy pours into the body. The Outer
142
Aura is colored. The six colors of the
spectrum are perceptible in it. Usually one
definite color is so dominant that the other
colors become almost imperceptible. That
dominant color in the Human Atmosphere
is the so-called Individual Color of the person
whose Aura is being investigated. Individuals
in the lower stages of evolution have
often their Auric Colors rather clouded with
an unpleasant grayish-brown tint. But the
higher the individual is evolved, the purer
and more luminous those Auric Colors become.
If the Auric Colors of two individuals
blend, they will feel in harmony with each
other. In the opposite case, they on the contrary
will have an unpleasant sensation and
will become restless, or even antagonistic.
That accounts largely for the fact that we
instinctively like to be with some individuals
and resent the society of others. The thickness
of the Outer Aura varies with different
parts of the body, and displays marked difference
between the Auras of different individuals.
In some it has a thickness of from
three to five inches, but its size may be
varied by changes in the physical, mental,
and emotional qualities and conditions of the
individual. The Outer Aura is exceptionally
strong around the head. When flowing
through the finger tips, the Life Force is
perceptible as a sort of misty waves of different
lengths. The strongest current proceeds
from the thumb. There, its visible
length is about two and a half inches. Next
143
comes the index finger, whose current appears
to be about two inches long. The fourth
finger's current is visible only for about an
inch and a half. The small finger's current
appears for about an inch. The middle
finger, the biggest of all, has a visible current
of only about a quarter of an inch. The
visible length of these waves is increased in
proportion to the strength of the magnetic
current flowing through the hand. The
Outer Aura reaches sometimes a thickness
of several feet in certain individuals with a
very strong mental or spiritual development.
In the latter case, the whole nature
of the human Aura is changed. Such
individuals seem to be surrounded by rays of
light, of very beautiful and changing colors.
Their Auras are not only very beautiful to
look at, but are also very soothing and healing
to an appreciable degree. It is often
sufficient merely to be in the presence of
such people in order to be benefited in every
way, physically, mentally, and morally.
With a healthy person, the human Aura is of
a pleasant, pure appearance, and quite
regular in its stratification. Abnormal or
unhealthy people, on the contrary, have a
very irregular Aura, full of protuberances
and cavities. The human Aura, when
expressing Life Energy alone, is not self
luminous, and can be perceived only by its
reflection of light. Yet the same Aura is
shining with its own luminosity whenever
expressing thought or emotion. A great
144
many diseases are nowadays diagnosed by
the appearance of the human Aura. For
that purpose are used certain chemical
screens impregnated with very sensitive
chemicals, on which is seen, as luminosity,
the human Aura, as soon as the individual
places himself behind the screen. Another
method of detecting the human Atmosphere
is to place the individual in front of a dark
background, in a comparatively dim artificial
light. In this instance, little glass screens
filled with certain chemical solutions which,
when one is looking through them, increase
the sensitiveness of the eye, are used in order
to enable the untrained eye to perceive the
Aura. Yet one can train one's eyes to perceive
radio-activity without artificial aids.
Those methods are used a great deal now in
hospitals, by up-to-date physicians.
Life Energy, being the Fundamental
Power of the Universe, ought to be used in
an ever increasing degree in everything we
do. No matter what kind of work we undertake,
we should first make the contact with
Universal Life Energy by the mental
method indicated in the second lesson.
Especially in human relations,
Life Energy becomes
invaluable.
The politician can employ it to strengthen
his speech, the minister to vitalize his sermon,
145
the artist to find inspiration, and the
scientist to solve his problems and make
discoveries. It is not only the privilege, but
also the duty, of human beings TO USE
THAT LIFE FORCE IN EVERY DEPART-
MENT OF THEIR LIVES, TO USE IT ALL
THE TIME, AND FOR EVERYTHING. In
doing so, an extraordinary change will come
to those who have been faithful and have
persevered to the end. They will notice
by and by that they can endure more work
and strain without feeling the same sense of
fatigue as before. They become mentally
more efficient, because Life Energy flowing
to their brain cells with an ever increasing
force stimulates them, and makes them work
more quickly and better. Reasoning becomes
clearer and more logical. And because
of the excess of Life Forces radiating from
every center of the body, work becomes what
it ought to he, a pleasure instead of an
onerous duty. The individual grows always
stronger through the continual use of that
Life Energy.
146
It is one of the first duties which we owe
as well to our selves as to others,
if we want to succeed in life and become
useful members in the great Human Family.
Forces are universal. Nature
expresses those Forces through every available
channel. We human beings are some
of the most important channels, for their
expression. Therefore we must be strong,
and desire and develop that strength all the
time, thus rapidly advancing along the path
of Evolution. Weakness is not only an
impediment, but is unnatural, because it is
in direct contradiction to All Power.
Whenever one wants to use Life Energy
for healing purposes, the best method of
procedure is the following:
{Note: Healing in any fashion should only
be performed while keeping in mind that it’s
success should be subject to God’s will.
It is thus required to include an appropriate
affirmation such as “God’s will be done,
not mine, in me and through me” before
attempting the healing prodcedure}
Have the patient comfortably seated, in a chair,
with body erect, yet not tense, relaxed physically,
mentally, and emotionally. Then make the
mental contact with Universal Life Energy.
After that contact is made, and the operator
feels that Force flowing through him, he
must place his hands on the shoulders of the
patient in such a way that the two thumbs
147
are joined on the seventh vertebra of the
patient's spinal column. The seventh verte.
bra is that prominence generally thought of
as the joint of the neck. It is one of the most
sensitive spots on the spinal column, and
the spot where the spinal nerve can be most
readily and most easily influenced. The
other four fingers must be placed on the
shoulders, pointing down the body. As the
magnetic current always flows through the
hand in the direction in which the finger
tips are pointing, it is advisable, as a general
rule, whenever treating the upper portion
of a patient's body, to have the finger
tips turned down. That process must
be reversed-that is, the finger tips must
be pointed upward-when the lower portion
of the body, from the waist down, is being
treated. The reason for this is that in every
instance the magnetic current must be
directed toward the solar plexus, which is
the great reservoir of that Force in the
human body. After his hands have been
placed in the proper position, all the operator
needs to do is consciously to remain an open
channel for the Life Energy, that it may
flow through him. There is no special need
to know which part of the patient's body is in
a disharmonious condition. Life Energy,
being self-governed, will do its work automatically,
and will flow to those parts of the
body which are in the greatest need of its
healing powers. The operator must keep his
hands on the shoulders of the patient until
148
he ceases to feel the life current flowing
through him. At that moment the patient's
body has reached the point of saturation,
and can no longer absorb the Magnetic
Force. To continue the treatment would be a
waste of time and energy. As a general rule,
such treatments ought to last from five to
fifteen minutes. No more precise indications
can be given concerning the duration of the
treatments, because each case must be
handled individually, as there are no two
people alike, and as even the same person
may react differently at different times. It
is left to the inner sense and intuition of the
operator to determine when he is to stop.
In practicing magnetic healing, one very
soon is able to develop that inner sense. A
fairly good indication that the treatment is
finished, is a peculiar desire to take one's
hands away from the shoulders of the patient.
In case one wishes to treat a particular local
trouble, one can, in addition to that first
treatment, give another, placing the hands
on the ailing part, and keeping them there
until one ceases to feel the Force flow. If the
diseased portion of the body is very small,
as in the case of eye, ear, brain, heart, or
other localized trouble, one can bunch the
fingers, bringing the tips together against
the tip of the thumb, and thus concentrate
the five individual rays of the Force upon
one point. Such a concentration of the
Force acts very strongly, and must therefore
be handled carefully, especially when
149
treating delicate organisms such as the eye.
As soon as the patient begins to feel a
certain burning sensation, due to that concentration
of the Magnetic Force into one
ray, the operator must remove his fingers
immediately. Otherwise he may burn the
patient, as if with fire or scalding water, and
burn him badly enough to produce a blister.
In the event of such a magnetic burn, all
that is necessary in order to cure it is to
pass one's hand lightly over the injured spot,
as if softly brushing it away, and all traces
of the magnetic burn will vanish like magic.
It is important to remember that whenever
a new treatment is started, even if on the
same patient, it is advisable to make a fresh
contact with Universal Life Energy. This
applies especially to beginners, who do not
know how to keep themselves consciously
open to the continual flow of the Force they
use. Later on, that renewal of contact for
each treatment becomes unnecessary, as
the conscious contact with the Universal
Life Energy, once established, remains for
quite a considerable length of time.
The method of treatment described above
is the classical method, which can be modified
and varied in infinite ways. For
instance, if the patient is lying in bed, or is
otherwise so situated that the operator
cannot put both hands on his shoulders, one
hand, the left one, can be placed so that the
index finger touches the seventh vertebra,
and the thumb rests on the shoulder, point150
ing downward. The right hand of the
operator grips the left hand of the patient
in such a manner that the index, middle,
and fourth fingers rest on the inner side of
the wrist, pointing up along the arm. If,
for some reason, only the patient's bands are
available, or even one alone, it is quite
sufficient for the operator to make the aforesaid
contact with that. In exceptional
cases, where no physical contact of any sort
is possible, the operator can send the current
into the body of the patient by merely
directing his finger tips toward it, using one
or both hands. The position of his arms is
of little consequence, as it is the position of
the finger tips which determines the direction
of the magnetic currents. These act like
light rays emanating from a reflector, and
are directed upward if the finger tips are
pointing upward, or downward if the finger
tips are pointing down.
The magnetic current is naturally attracting,
but it can be made repelling by a simple
effort of will power.
cases of self treatment, the way to
proceed is as follows. Since one cannot
conveniently place ones hands on ones
own seventh vertebra, so as to convey the
magnetic current into the body, the mental
contact with the Universal Life Energy is
sufficient. As soon as one feels that the
Life Force bas sufficiently saturated the
body, one can then use one's hand as
described above to heal any local trouble, by
151
placing it over the diseased spot. The
general way of procedure is thenceforth
identical with that employed in treating
someone else. The only difference is in the
beginning, when the contact with the
seventh vertebra and the shoulders is
omitted.
It is sometimes noticeable, in treating
one's self and others, especially in cases of
chronic organic troubles, that after a few
successive treatments, when the general
condition of the patient seems to have been
greatly improved, suddenly there occurs a
relapse, and the patient may feel even worse
than before the treatment. That relapse
is due to the fact that the diseased part of
the body was, before the treatment, lacking
in vitality.
The disease was like a crust of carbon
impeding the normal functions of the affected
tissues, and cutting them off from the
nutrition essential to their health. When
the vivifying current of Life Energy is
directed against the diseased spot, it acts
like a blast of pure oxygen brought into contact
with carbon. Just as carbon, upon its
chemical union with oxygen, glows to a
sudden fierce incandescence, and then
vanishes, so disease when exposed to the
purging current of Life Energy, must burst
into an intense flame that consumes it
utterly, thus burning away the barrier
between the sick tissues and the flow of vital
forces. That is called magnetic chemicaliza152
tion. It is an unpleasant, but favorable
symptom. Therefore all one has to do in
such cases is to continue the magnetic treatment
with increased energy. The ailment
will be eventually completely destroyed, and
the diseased part of the body thus restored
to its normal condition.
When treating, the operator must take
toward the patient an attitude of love
because one of the qualities of love is expansion.
Expansion of the inner gateways
through which the Life Energy is flowing
into the operator enables the Force to enter
in greater volume, thus insuring a more
successful treatment.
One of the many applications of the
magnetic current for healing purposes is
the inducing of the so-called magnetic sleep
-that is, a sleep induced by the uuse of the
magnetic current. Individuals who suffer
from insomnia, or who, for some other
reason, are unable to sleep, are greatly
benefited by this magnetic sleep which, no
matter how short it may be, rests and
invigorates the body beyond anything one
could ever expect. When induced in the
daytime, about fifteen minutes of magnetic
sleep is all that a patient can ever need.
After that, the patient must be awakened,
because to let him sleep longer would mean
to go against the natural ascending movement
of the Earth magnetic currents of the
lay. This would result in a feeling of
heaviness, or often in a headache. A quarter
153
of an hour of magnetic sleep during the day
is equivalent to six or seven hours of ordinary
night's sleep. When the magnetic sleep is
induced at night, there is no necessity to
awaken the subject, as the magnetic sleep
will presently lapse into normal sleep of its
own accord. in order to induce magnetic
sleep the following method is recommended.
To start with, make the mental contact
with the Universal Life Energy. Then place
the hands, in the manner previously indicated,
on the seventh vertebra of the subject,
who should be comfortably seated in an easy
chair, with head reclining. When the body
of the patient is saturated with the Magnetic
Force, take the hands from his shoulders,
and stand in front of him in such a way that
his knees are facing the knees of the operator.
The hands of the latter, thumbs joined and
finger tips pointing toward the forehead of
the subject and lightly touching it, must
remain in that position for several minutes.
Thus the magnetic current will flow into
the brain, will fill it to capacity, and will
then begin to condense because of the law of
Attraction, which continually operates with
the current and cements together all the
successive magnetic waves proceeding from
the hands of the operator. The operator
must move his hands slowly down across the
face of the subject, but without touching
it, as low as the solar plexus. Prom there
the hands are returned to their original
position, each slowly describing a half circle
154
outward on its own side, and meeting the
other before the forehead. From five to
fifteen minutes, according to the individual,
is sufficient to put the average subject into
a magnetic sleep. In some exceptional cases,
the magnetic sleep is induced almost instantaneously,
while in other cases it may
require several successive trials. Those
movements of the hands which induce
magnetic sleep are called magnetic passes.
Slow passes condense the magnetic current,
that is, put the individual into a magnetic
sleep. Quick passes awaken, dispelling the
condensed forces. To awaken a subject
plunged into a magnetic sleep, all one needs
to do is to repeat the same passes, only very
quickly instead of slowly. The subject will
awaken, for the reason explained above. If
the subject does not feel completely awakened,
a quick brushing movement by both
hands from the center of the forehead outward
to the temples, and a similar operation
from the back of the head, will entirely
dispel every lingering sensation of drowsiness.
When properly treated, the subject
must awaken from the magnetic sleep
refreshed and invigorated, and with a pleasant
feeling of buoyancy. An opposite effect
would indicate that the operator consciously
or unconsciously used his will
power, and not the natural law, to put the
individual to sleep. In other words, he
willed, or hypnotized, his patient into
slumber. Such a method is very objection155
able because of its disharmonious effects on
both operator and subject. Therefore the
operator must guard carefully against
employing his will power during the magnetic
passes, and must let the law of Attraction
operate unimpeded. Thus he will obtain the
most favorable results.
In case of self-inducement of the magnetic
sleep, the method of procedure is quite
different. There the individual, who is both
operator and subject, must clasp his hands
behind his head, and then make the mental
contact with the Universal Life Energy.
The Force will flow through his hands, and
will do its condensatory work, as a result of
which will come the magnetic sleep. In
order to awaken in due time, if that sleep
is induced during the day, one must impress
upon one's Sub-consciousness, before going
to sleep, the order to awaken at the prescribed
time. And the Sub-consciousness, in
obedience to the command, will do it with a
surprising readiness and a mathematical
precision. No hesitation or doubt should be
in one s mind when commanding the Subconsciousness,
as otherwise failure will be the
result.
There is another problem which is bothering
Humanity today, as it has done throughout
all times. That problem is, how to
attain Success and Prosperity. All kinds of
devices and means are used by human beings
in order to reach this goal. Needless to say,
illegitimate Prosperity attained through
156
wrong means, by taking unfair advantage
of other people, is not and cannot be lasting,
because it is unnatural, transgressing
Universal Laws, and is ultimately most destructive
to its possessor. True Success and
legitimate Prosperity are always based on the
Laws of the Absolute. They are the result
of our harmonization with Infinite Harmony,
which is Power. That Power then flows
through every channel which we open to it.
Yet why is it that some people, who seemingly
follow and live in accord with the Laws
of Universal Harmony, are apparently unable
to demonstrate in their lives Success
and Prosperity? In such cases, the cause
must be sought in the individual himself.
For some reason the channels through which
affluence and harmony normally flow are
either undeveloped, paralyzed, or dried up.
In the Absolute, that is, in the realm of
the Real and the Eternally Harmonious –
everything, every action,
every cause, culminates in a perfect effect,
which is complete Success. Affluence in
everything good, in all supply of all forces
and powers, is another eternal reality. The
only reason human beings do not always
achieve it is because they are not always in
accord with it, or are closed to it.
One of the sad experiences which Humanity,
especially, has to go through, together
with the rest of this material world, is old
157
age and death. in this world of material
phenomena, in this present state of consciousness,
where everything has a beginning and
an end, because of the limited concept of
Time and Space, the privilege of Youth, of
Strength or Power, of Beauty, is hut a
fleeting moment in human lives. Strange to
say, man supposed to he the highest
manifestation of the Absolute, has the
shortest space of tune allowed him for the
enjoyment of those privileges. Animals,
plants, minerals, all seem to be much more
favored in that direction. About one third
of the human life is spent in developing that
organism which the Soul needs for its
expression on this earth plane. The second
third permits the enjoyment of that life.
The last third is marked by a rapidly declining
curve. It is a continual disintegration
and loss of that which has been so painfully
built up during the first period of one's life.
Whenever one thinks about it, one must
inevitably conclude that there is something
fundamentally wrong and destructive, either
in the Universal Laws and Forces of Nature,
or in man. Universal Laws ARE fundamentally
constructive and harmonious. So
are the Basic Forces underlying all Creation.
Therefore it is obvious that they cannot be
wrong or destructive. Then, the only
logical conclusion is that the wrong and
destructiveness abide in man himself. There
-- and there alone-must be sought the cause
for all human ills amid troubles, sorrow and
158
suffering. The cause once discovered, proper
means can be used in order to remove that
cause. One of the greatest privileges and
powers man has is FREE WILL. That Free
Will he can use constructively or destructively.
Man creates his own heaven and his
own hell. They are man-made, not created
by God. They are states of consciousness,
not localities, and they last as long as one
remains a willing host to them.
It has been proven nowadays that
individual cells of the body,
even when separated from that body, if
kept in proper surroundings, can not only
sustain their life, but can even develop and
increase. And as the body is composed of
about fifty billions of those cells, one must
come to the logical conclusion that the
whole of the body could live and prosper
for long periods of time, if permitted to do
so. Ignorance is the cause of all the trouble.
We do not know the vital importance of
attuning ourselves to the Laws of Universal
Harmony, which means Life Eternal. We
are relying all the time on the limited
reserves of life forces within us, and are
spending them faster than our bodies supply
them to us, instead of being in constant
159
conscious communication with Universal
Life Energy. We continually transgress
natural laws, by eating improper food, as
well in quality as in quantity, and by wearing
inappropriate clothes which interfere with
the normal functions of the body, either
through pressure or through preventing
the body from getting all the benefit of the
invigorating action of the surrounding
atmosphere, and the purifying and stimulating
influence of the sun rays. Such clothes
are against common sense and the Laws of
Harmony and Beauty. We do not sufficiently
exercise that body of ours, and we undermine
its resisting qualities by resorting to medicines
and all sorts of drugs in case of illness,
and by the immoderate use of alcoholic
drinks and more harmful drugs when we are
well. We think inharmoniously, and those
thoughts of ours-unaware in most cases
as we are that they will some day be visited
upon us act most destructively on us.
The same is true of our negative emotions,
such as hatred, jealousy, revenge, etc.
Even if we feel these emotions toward other
individuals, ultimately we are the ones who
will be most harmed by indulging them,
because of the law of Retribution. In
addition to all this, that body of ours also
has to fight continually all kinds of outside
disintegrating influences, such as sudden
changes of temperature and atmospheric
conditions, and the incessant assault of
innumerable armies of microbes and deadly
160
germs of all sorts of diseases. And finally
we prey upon our own body, like vampires,
in drawing upon each cell for life force,
which we usually then consume within our
own self, wasting it in countless ways.
Instead of supplying and stimulating each
cell of our body with Life Force from within
and from without, we tax each of those
cells to the limit of its endurance. No
wonder that after a certain time they
become depleted of life force, their activities
are lessened, and they exhibit the symptoms
of old age and decrepitude. Under those
conditions it is really surprising that our
material body can live at all. The only
reason why it can is because of its. extraordinary
power of resistance. In order to do
justice to our own selves, and to do at least
as well as animals and plants, which increase
in size, strength and beauty until almost the
very end of their earthly existence, we have
to start to live a normal and constructive
life, physically, mentally and emotionally.
We have to take into consideration the Laws
of the Universe, and the Forces of Nature,
and do our best to attune ourselves to them.
And above all, we must make continual
conscious contact with the Universal Life
Energy, which by and by will fill to its
utmost capacity every cell of our body,
thus making it grow and prosper in every
direction. Each one of us ought to devote
from a quarter to a half hour daily to the
general invigorating and rejuvenation of all
161
our body. In order to obtain that, proceed
in the following way. Seated in an easy
chair, make the mental contact with the
Universal Life Energy, and when the Force
is felt flowing, consciously direct it into the
brain, into every organ of the body, into
the tissues, the skin, the cells. Think it that
way, wish it that way, feel it that way.
The guiding thought, backed up by constructive
will power, will make the best use of
the inherent qualities of the Life Energy,
namely, self-government and harmonization.
Think Harmony, Youth, and Beauty; wish
them, feel them, knowing that they are the
result of the Eternal Law of Life and Love,
CONTINUALLY EXPPESSING ITSELF
THROUGH EACH INDIVIDUAL. It is like
bathing the whole human organism in a
living stream of Life Force and, if faithfully
performed, the result of it will exceed all
expectations. Each cell of the body will
exhibit a greater constructive activity, each
organ of the body will perform its duties with
an ever increasing power and precision, thus
giving all members of the body the possibility
of manifesting in a most perfect way
the activities of the soul. The whole body
will be gradually regenerated according to a
new and better standard. We must always
bear in mind that our body is a statue
moulded by our soul with the chisel of our
thoughts, the Life Force of the Universe
supplying both the material and the Energy
which the soul needs to perform that work.
162
The harmonious co-operation of all three is
necessary, yet in a way the Life Force is
most important, because without it thought
and even the Soul itself are powerless. The
more one feels the Life Force flowing through
one's self during that conscious stimulation
of the body, the better the process of
reconstruction and rejuvenation will proceed;
and a new, vigorous, harmonious, and
beautiful body, a proper channel for the
expression of the Soul, will ultimately be
the result. Thus the limits between death
and birth of human beings will be removed
further and further apart from each other,
health and longevity increased, and especially
one greatest advantage obtained, namely,
the preservation of our physical, mental,
and emotional powers in a state of strength
and activity, giving us the sensation and
appearance of youth and beauty to the very
end of our earthly days. That will
finally bring another result which will come
as the logical sequence of that work of
rejuvenation, and UNINTITERUPTED, ETERNAL
LIFE, NOW ONLY A WONDERFUL HOPE
WILL THEN BECOME A RADIANT REALITY
163
164
LESSON FOUR
1. QUES. What is the human atmosphere,
or Aura?
ANS. It is the radio-activity of the
human body, due to the emanation
of Life Energy from it.
2. QUES. Does that radio-activity belongonly to human beings?
ANS. No. Animals, plants, minerals,
and even gases possess also their
own radio-activity.
3. QUES. Is the Aura self-luminous?
ANS. No. It is rendered luminous only
by light striking it.
4. QUES. Are all human Auras alike?
ANS. No. They vary according to the
sex, state of health, and age of
the individual, and also to the
physical, mental and emotional
development.
5. QUES. How many strata has the human
Aura?
ANS. Three. The Etheric Double, the
Inner Aura, and the Outer Aura.
6. QIJES. Which stratum is colored?
ANS. The Outer Aura which expresses
the personal color of the individual.
7. QUES. If the auric colors of two indi-
viduals blend, what is the effect?
ANS. They will feel in harmony with
each other. In the opposite case,
they will feel indifferent or even
antagonistic.
165
8. QUES. How thick is the ordinary human
Aura?
ANS. Prom five inches upwards.
9. QUES. How can the Aura be perceived?
ANS. By mechanical means, or by
training one's eyes.
10. QUES. What is the practical use ofinvestigating Auras?
ANS. To find out the general condition
of health, etc., of the individual.
11. QUES. How often, and where, shouldUniversal Life Energy be used.
ANS. It should be used in every department
of human life, all the time,
and for everything.
12. QIJES. What practical result is obtained
through the continual use of
Universal Life Energy?
ANS. The individual grows stronger in
every way, physically, mentally,
and spiritually.
13. QUES. How is Universal Life Energyused for healing purposes
ANS. First contact it, then send it
through the hands into the body
of the patient.
14. QUES. At which point is the Magnetic
166
Force most readily conducted into
the body of the patient?
ANS. The seventh vertebra of the
spinal column.
15. QUES. Does the magnetic current flow
equally through all fingers?
ANS. No. It flows strongest through
the thumb, and weakest through
the middle finger.
16. QUES. What direction does the magnetic
current take when flowing through
the hands?
ANS. The direction in which the finger
tips are pointing.
17. QUES. Does the magnetic treatment
work automatically?
ANS. Yes, because Universal Life
Energy is self governing.
18. QUES. How do magnetic forces work?
ANS. Always to re-establish equilibrium.
19. QUES. How long should a magnetic
treatment last?
ANS. As a general rule, from five to
fifteen minutes.
20. QUES. How does one know when tostop it?
ANS. By an inner sense that the patient
can absorb no more, because his
body has reached a point of
saturation.
21. QUES. How should one treat a local
trouble?
ANS. By placing one's hand on the
167
diseased part, and letting the
current flow.
22. QUES. How is the magnetic current
most strongly concentrated on a
small area?
ANS. By bunching the finger tips.
23. QUES. How is a magnetic burn cured?
ANS. By passing the hand lightly over
the injured spot.
24. QUES. Does one need to make a new
contact with Universal Life
Energy for each successive treatmen
ANS. For beginners, yes.
25. QUES. What would be the result if atreatment were started without
first making the contact with
Universal Life Energy?
ANS. The patient would immediately
absorb all the available amount
of Life Energy stored in the
operator, and would leave him
completely depleted.
26. QUES. Is it necessary, when treating apatient, to contact him physically?
ANS. No. The magnetic current, if
properly directed can be sent at a
distance.
27. QUES. Is the magnetic current attractive
or repellent?
ANS. It is naturally attractive, but it
can be made repellent through an
effort of will power.
168
28. QUES. How shall one proceed in treating
oneself magnetically?
ANS. First make the mental contact
with Universal Life Energy and
let it flow through the body.
When the body is properly
saturated with it, use the hands
as indicated above.
29. QUES. What is magnetic chemicalization,
and what are its causes?
ANS. It is the seeming increase of the
negative condition of the patient,
due to the vivifying power of the
magnetic current.
30. QUES. Should the treatment be stopped
because of the chemicalization?
ANS. No. It should be continued with
increased energy, and the ailment
will eventually be completely
destroyed.
31. QUES. What should be the attitude ofthe operator toward the patient
during the treatment?
ANS. One of compassion and love.
32. QUES. Is it necessary to treat the patient
mentally at the same time?
ANS. No, though a scientific mental
treatment ,combined with the magnetic
one, produces better results.
33. QUES. What is the magnetic sleep?
ANS. It is a sleep induced by the use
of the magnetic current.
34. QUES. What is the difference betweenmagnetic and hypnotic sleep?
169
ANS. The first, based on Life Power, is
beneficial; the second, based on
will power, is detrimental.
35. QUES. When is the magnetic sleep
needed?
ANS. In case of insomnia or weariness.
36. QUES. How long should it last?
ANS. About fifteen minutes when induced
in the daytime; throughout
the whole night when induced at
night.
37. QUES. What is the method of procedure?
ANS. Make the mental contact with
Universal Life Energy, and let the
current flow through the hands
into the brain of the patient.
Then move the hands slowly
down, without touching the face
of the patient, as low as the solar
plexus. From there the hands are
returned to their original position,
slowly describing a half circle
outward, and meeting before the
forehead of the patient. Repeat.
38. QUES. How long does it take to inducea magnetic sleep?
ANS. Prom a few minutes upward
varying according to the individual.
39. QUES. What is the correct method for
awakening one from a magnetic
sleep?
ANS. Use the same movements, only
quickly instead of slowly.
170
40. QUES. What are those magnetic movements
called?
ANS. Magnetic passes.
41. QUES. Why should a magnetic sleep
induced in daytime last only
fifteen minutes?
ANS. Because it is against the ascending
movement of Primal Energy.
42. QUES. How is magnetic sleep induced
on oneself?
ANS. By clasping the hands behind
the head, and making the contact
with Universal Life Energy.
43. QUES. How does one awaken oneselffrom a self-induced magnetic
sleep?
ANS. By commanding the subconscious
self, before going to sleep, to
awaken one at the desired time.
44. QUES. What are the usual causes ofpoverty and material limitations?
ANS. Undeveloped, paralyzed, or driedup
channels through which affluence
and harmony should
normally flow.
171
45. QUES. What is method of procedure
to rejuvenate an old body?
ANS. Make the mental contact with
Universal Life Energy, and consciously
send it to every part of
the body, to every organ, to
every cell.
46. QUES. Hew often should this be done,
and how long each time?
ANS. Every day for about a quarter
of an hour each time.
47. QUES. What will be the result?
ANS. The body will be completely
renewed and made stronger,
younger and more harmonious.
48. QUES. Has it been done before?
ANS. Yes, so far as is known, by Enoch,
Elijah, Jesus, and others.
49. QUES. What promise given to Humanity
about two thousand years ago
will thus be realized?
ANS. The Uninterrupted Eternal
Life, now only a wonderful dream,
will then become a Radiant
Reality.
172
173
174
EVEN LAWS IN THE PRESENT
STATE OF HUMAN CON-
SCIOUSNESS GOVERN THIS
WORLD. OF THOSE SEVEN
LAWS, THREE ARE ETERNAL,
IMMUTABLE, LAWS OF TILE
ABSOLUTE, AND FOUR ARE TRANSITORY,
MUTABLE, LAWS OF THE RELATIVE.
THE THREE LAWS OF THE
ABSOLUTE
1. LIFE, MIND TRUTH, LOVE, SPIRIT
IS ALL IN ALL.
2. THE SAME LAW GOVERNS ALWAYS
EVERYTHING, EVERYWHERE, IN THE
SAME WAY, FROM THE GREATEST STAR
DOWN TO THE SMALLEST ELECTRON.
3. EVERYTHING IS VIBRATION.
175
In the Absolute, those three Laws are One
Law, called the GREAT LAW. To our present
state of consciousness that One Great
Universal Law manifests itself as a triune
ray; we perceive it in its threefold aspect, our
consciousness acting as a prism; therefore, as
we are studying these Laws now, we must
consider them as they appear to us at present.
LIFE, MIND, TRUTH, LOVE, SPIRIT, IS
ALL IN ALL. These Five which were
explained in the first lesson are the Alpha
and the Omega, the beginning and the end of
everything; they are a Law by themselves,
the Law of Life, of Mind, of Truth, of Love
which is the Law of Spirit. They include
everything, and that is why Jesus, who knew
these Laws, said, "Love thy God (The Great
Principle) with all thy heart, and with all
thy soul, and with all thy mind, and with
all thy strength, and love thy neighbor as
thyself," and when He was asked further,
"what about the other commandments?" He
answered, "All the laws and all the prophets
are in those two commandments." The
Great Principle, the Absolute, is all Life,
all Mind, all Truth, all Love, all Spirit;
all there is, is in the Great All, and
if we apply that Law, the Law of Life, of
Mind, of Truth and of Love, to all problems
of our daily life, we work out, without noticing
it, all the perfection we can ever aspire to,
176
we build up the Pyramid of our own life
and reach the Point of Spirit, and we do
not notice how it happens, because it is the
Great Principle Itself Who is working to
that end through us. It is Its work as much
as ours. All we have to do is to be conscious,
open channels for that.
THE SAME LAW GOVERNS ALWAYS
EVERYTHING, EVERYWHERE, IN THE
SAME WAY, FROM THE GREATEST STAR
DOWN TO THE SMALLEST ELECTRON. The
wonderful simplicity of that Universal
Law is that there is but ONE LAW which
underlies all other laws, operates on all
planes, and expresses itself through everything,
always in the same way. The formation
of the electron, of the atom, of the body,
of our planet, of this World, of the Universe,
are ALL BASED ON THAT ONE LAW.
Everywhere is seen the operation of that
Law, which is also called the Law of Analogy,
''AS IT IS ON THE HIGHEST PLANE SO IT IS
ON THE LOWEST." That is, that One
Pattern is expressed through millions of
aspects and yet is always One. For instance,
let us take the sphere. An electron is a
microscopical sphere. Vapors are made up
of tiny spheres of water. A dewdrop is a
sphere, and so are the particles of mercury
or the little red and white corpuscles in our
blood. A soap bubble is a sphere, our
177
Earth also, and all other planets, the sun,
the stars, and the worlds. Why? Because
the Great Law says that everything which
wants to .persevere in existence must take
the form of a sphere, which is a body in
which all parts are in perfect relation one to
another and also to its center, and which
therefore is so perfectly balanced that it
can offer the maximum resistance to all
kinds of outside disintegrating influences.
Another example: All vibrations emanate
from a given point in all directions in waves,
forming continually increasing spheres. A
stone thrown in the water starts spherical
vibratory waves, which, where they touch
the surface of the water, appear as circles,
enlarging till they reach the shore of that
body of water. It is the same with all other
vibrations, sound, light, Hertzian waves,
magnetic waves, also thoughts and Spiritual
Vibrations, all this again because of the
Great Law, which decrees that all vibrations
must normally proceed in waves, forming
continually increasing spheres which are
kept in that condition by the Law of
Attraction perpetually operating through
those vibrations. That Law is so infinite,
so universal, that in our present mental
development we can only begin to perceive
its numberless manifestations. That Law
is often also called the Great Law. The
knowledge of that Law enables one to calculate
with mathematical precision even things
the nature of which is as yet unknown to us.
178
Geometry, mathematics, all exact
sciences, have the Great Law as foundation
of their individual laws. For instance, three
times three makes nine, and three million
times three million makes also nine plus as
many zeros as there are zeros in the two
numbers. Why is it so? Because of the
Great Law expressing itself through the
mathematical laws. Those who study zoology
also discover very soon the various
manifestations of the Great Law. There are
so-called wild animals, lions, tigers, panthers
and so forth. Their coats are of certain
colors, arranged in certain designs, which
are expressing their qualities. The same
characteristics are found among birds of
prey, eagles, hawks, owls, etc., as these
occupy amongst the birds the corresponding
place to that occupied by wild animals
among the beasts. It is the same among
fishes, insects, mushrooms, trees, plants and
minerals. The same distinguishing color
schemes, the same combinations, throughout
the whole round of Nature. Take the rainbow,
that wonderful bridge, shining with the
six colors of the spectrum and connecting
Heaven with Earth. Its iridescence, produced
by the refraction of light, is found on
the soap bubble, on oil-coated water, in the
diamond, also in the opal, that stone both
precious and mysterious; it is displayed on
the wings of certain butterflies, on different
insects, on birds, and even in the hair of
human beings, where there is a certain
179
iridescence. Why? Again because of the
Great Law. Throughout the whole cycle of
Creation are everywhere seen these wonderful
expressions of the Great Law. Infinite
are the aspects through which it continually
manifests itself. There is the glorious sunset,
wonderful colors in the sky. But the
sun's rays have no color, they are white;
the clouds have no color, they are also white;
the air has no color, it is transparent; yet
taken together in a certain combination, they
all make a wonderful sunset. It is the relation
of the different lights one to another,
shades and lights, white rays broken up in
different rays, interpenetrating and combining
one with another colorless elements,
yet producing the most wonderful colors.
All this is the result of that one Great Law.
ALL IS VIBRATION. This is the third
and last of these Absolute, Immutable Laws.
Is it possible that Vibrations will be eternal?
They will be, as they always have been.
Even Spirit Itself communicates through
vibrations. Maybe some day they will be
called by another name, but it is not the
name which is so important, it is the nature
of the thing itself. THE WHOLE UNIVERSE
IS BUT VIBRATION. When we speak the
sound is conveyed through vibrations;
through vibrations do we also see, smell,
taste and touch. Everything is done through
180
vibration. Sound is vibration, light is
vibration; so are the emanations of radium,
wireless telegraphy, telephony; all use
vibrations as agents. Thoughts also are
vibrations; so is Lye; everything is vibrating;
vibrations are penetrating all planes, and
therefore even in the Absolute everything is
vibration. There are different rates of
vibrations, infinite varieties of them, some
so high, so subtle, that of them we cannot
have any concept just now. ALL IS ETER-
NAL VIBRATION BECAUSE VIBRATION
IS LIFE ITSELF, AND LIFE IS ONE OF
THE FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS OF THE
ABSOLUTE, THE GREAT PRINCIPLE. The
operation of this Law is explained in detail
in the second, fourth, sixth, and seventh
lessons.
THE FOUR LAWS OF THE
RELATIVE
1. THE LAW OF POLARITY
2. THE LAW OF RHYTHM.
3. THE LAW OF GENDER.
4. THE LAW OF CAUSE AND EFFECT.
THE LAW OF POLARITY: EVERYTHING
IN THIS WORLD IN THE PRESENT STATE
OF HUMAN CONSCIOUSNESS APPEARS TO
HAVE TWO POLES, THE POSITIVE AND
THE NEGATIVE POLES-GOOD AND EVIL,
HEAVEN AND HELL, LIFE AND DEATH,
LIGHT AND DARKNESS, DAY AND NIGHT,
181
WHITH AND BLACK, SOUTH AND NORTH,
PEACE AND WAR, YES AND NO, POSITIVE
AND NEGATIVE, ETC.
Everywhere, no matter where we turn,
there is that law of Polarity or Duality.
It is the law of the Pairs of Opposites. Any
opposites, even men and women, come under
that law. It is a very important law, which
we think we cannot master, to which we
must submit, as it has taken possession not
only of the physical but also of the mental
plane. In the most ancient religions, the
law of Duality or Polarity is manifested,
prevalent. There are the Days and Nights
of Brahma, the Absolute ,----Manavantaras
and Pralayas, periods of activities and
periods of rest, periods of manifestation and
periods of non-manifestation, periods of
being and periods of non-being. It is believed
to be an immutable Law, a Law of the
Absolute, but that is not correct. In one of
the sacred books of the Hindus, in the
Bhagavad-Gita, Krishna, the One Who
Knew, when speaking about the Absolute,
about Divinity, said that GOD IS ABOVE
THE PAIRS OF OPPOSITRS, that means,
ABOVE THE LAW OF DUALITY OR POLAR-
ITY. The law of Duality therefore cannot
be a Divine Law if God is above it because
God and Divine Laws must be one. UNITY
IS THE LAW OF THE ABSOLUTE. Yet
religious, philosophical and sometimes scientific
teachings are based on the law of Dual182
ity. As long as the law of Duality, or Polarity,
will be accepted as an immutable law,
it will keep this World enslaved. Peace and
Harmony will remain but a beautiful dream,
because that law means a continual warfare
between the two principles, the positive
and the negative-and there is the question,
which one of them will win? One will for a
time, and under those conditions, Harmony
can never be attained. When opposites
are coming together they emphasize each
other's opposition. It is only like which
attracts like, and thus becomes one whole;
but there is no possible unity between two
opposites.
It is one of the most subtle and powerful
laws on Earth, that law of Polarity or Duality,
but it is not an eternal law, despite the
assertions of some of the oldest Religions
and greatest Philosophies. Humanity is
hypnotized by it, and as long as human
beings will submit themselves to that law,
it will operate and they will always be
swinging between life and death, good and
evil, peace and war, and so forth. If we
analyze that law from the point of view of
Science, we find that it is not a true law.
We say there is light and there is darkness,
yet this is not a correct statement. THERE
IS ONLY LIGHT. Darkness is but a suppositional
absence of light. There is no such
thing as real darkness, because light vibrations
penetrate everywhere. We think that
light is only what we see. Yet we perceive
183
only the range of rays from red to violetthat
is, the six colors of the Spectrum.
There are also rays below the Red and
beyond the Violet which we do not see, and
those invisible rays are the most powerful.
Light visible and invisible is everywhere,
therefore there cannot be, THERE IS, NO
DARKNESS. There are only degrees and
different kinds of light. All, IS LIGHT.
Even that seemingly utter darkness and
void of the inter-stelier space is penetrated
by vibrations, invisible to the human eye,
of the Absolute Light, which is Attraction
or Love. The same with good and evil.
There is no absolute evil. There are only
conditions of relativity, of good. There is
the ultimate good, and there is the very
first starting point of good, and naturally
there is all the scale to develop from the
point to the infinite. It is obvious that if
the point and the infinite are placed together,
the contrast is so great that they appear to
be opposites. Yet such a comparison is not
right, as there is all the infinite number of
links between them, each successive link
being a part of that endless chain or circle
which has no beginning nor end. This
scientific fact cannot be ignored. GOOD,
taken from the scientific point of view, IS
EVERYWHERE, OMNIPRESENT. There are
degrees of good, that is all, but no evil.
Evil is but a suppositional absence of good,
therefore non-existing, as good is all-pervad-
ing. The same is found to be true with
184
every other pair of opposites which one begins
to analyze. Soon the fact is discovered that
it is only the positive which has a real
existence. The Earth has two poles. One is
called the North and the other the South
pole. The South pole is a high mountain,
the North pole is a cavity; hut we call them
North and South poles because we imagine
that there is a top and there is a bottom.
If we change our position, then really the
North pole would be below and the South
pole above. One must try to visualize those
things also from the point of view of the
Absolute and not only from that of the
Relative. Scientifically speaking, there is no
East or West, as a definite location; it is but
a direction, pointed out by the magnetic
needle, relative to the point from which one
is taking it. When we are in China, the
East will be in America, but when we are
in Europe, America becomes West to us and
China would then be East. These are only
human concepts, created and used by us to
distinguish the Unlimited with our limited
perception; to find, to direct ourselves in the
Infinite, which has no direction.
There is the YES and NO. How few people
know that as soon as we make a positive
statement and say, "Yes, I am going to do
that," immediately from somewhere out
of the unknown arises the silent opposition
"No." And it works so strongly against
us, that we usually then have all kinds of
difficulties in performing that which we
185
intended to do. Why does it happen?
Because of the law of Polarity. The law of
Polarity continually interferes with all our
human affairs. That is why we are all the
time swinging between good and evil,
between hope and fear, between success and
failure. There is another law still worse
which usually works together with the law
of Polarity, and that is the so-called law of
Rhythm. Both are there, ready to stop all
human endeavors, to destroy our works, and
thus prevent us from progress. A great
many people have had experience in that
direction, and they have grown wise; they
never will say "I am going to do that"; they
say "I am going TO TRY," because they
have noticed that as soon as they make a
positive statement, something seems to be
continually interfering with it. Yet nothing
of that kind happens if a neutral form of
speech is used. What is the reason? Why
does the negative seem to be so strong when
the positive should be the stronger? When
we make an individual statement, a positive
one, we simply state the positive from our
human point of view; we hack it up only
by our own limited forces. It is just as
circumscribed as we humanly are circumscribed;
yet it is not a little part of the
negative, but the whole of it, which the law
of Polarity causes to rise automatically each
time as a negation, in opposition to our positive
statement. That is why it is so overwhelming.
Just as the whole of the ocean
186
striking a little piece of wood carries it
away, so the whole of the negative, in which
Humanity believes, and utterly fears, sweeps
away and destroys our individual positive
statements. YET, POSITIVE STATEMENTS
CAN BE MADE IN SUCH A WAY THAT
NOTHING CAN DESTROY THEM. If we say
“WITH GOD’S HELP” or 'WITH THE
HELP OF THE GREAT LAW I am going to
do that," such a statement covers the whole
ground, because NEITHER GOD NOR THE
GREAT LAW HAVE OPPOSITES. Satan once
attempted to oppose Divinity, but that
opposition proved itself a complete failure.
The world is not divided between good and
evil. The Great Principle is the ONE,
ONE, and IT IS ALL. Therefore, when we
place the Absolute or the Great Law behind
our statements, we can make any statement
we want, because there is no possible opposetion
to those two.
Another way to neutralize that law of
Polarity is continually to refuse to see thc
negative, always to place thc weight in the
positive scale, to try to see, even in things
most unpleasant, something good. Thus
we cast the weight in the right scale, in the
positive, and the result is, that. by and by
the law of Polarity will be neutralized, and
finally will cease to operate in our Jives at all.
Then, ONLY the positive will come to us.
Usually there is always the negative coming
together with the positive because of that
very law of Polarity; but when we will have
187
overcome that law, we will realize that there
are no opposites any more, no days and
nights, but, metaphorically speaking, only
an Eternal Day. In the Revelation, the
Inspired Writer, when describing the Holy
City, which lies foursquare-that is, the
Realm of Perfection-says 'There is no
night there." There is NO NEGATIVE, NO
LAW OF POLARITY IN THE ABSOLUTE.
THERE ALL IS UNITY.
We must not only affirm good, hut SEE
GOOD, KNOW GOOD; not try to excuse evil,
but to explain it. We must, through our
own reasoning process, see the real motive
behind everything, and then we will always
find something positive. There is never a
complete absence of good. When we make
statements in our daily life, WE MUST BE
POSITIVE, but positive with the Great Law
behind us to back up our words. We should
recognize the law of Polarity only to the
extent of endeavoring to overcome it, and
we should always know it to be a TEMPO-
RARY MUTABLE LAW above which we must
some day rise. When we overcome that law,
we rise to a power unknown to us now,
because so great. The best way to get rid of
something negative, is first to detect it;
second, not to fear it, and finally, to
DESTROY IT BY REALIZING ITS NON-
EXISTENCE IN THE REALM OF ETERNAL
HARMONY. Simply to close one's eyes and
say there is no such thing as evil is not practical
at all, as that very thing will then usually
188
happen, precisely because of the operation
of the law of Polarity. If we want to do
something, LET US DO IT, AND KNOW
THAT THERE IS THE GREAT LAW BEHIND
US, WHICH WILL GIVE US AID AND
ASSISTANCE IN ALL THAT IS RIGHT.
Everybody knows how difficult it is to
keep a secret. It seems to be burning on
one's lips; one is almost compelled to give
it away. Why? Because of the law of
Polarity. When we are told NOT TO TELL,
the Silent Opposition, due to the continual
operation of the law, says, "DO TELL," and
we usually yield to that silent command. People
call it temptation, the voice of evil; in reality,
it is but the working of the law of Polarity.
Very often we find ourselves undecided
as to what we have to do. Why is it? Again
because of the law of Polarity. We take a
decision and as soon as we take one, we
almost regret that we did it. With some
people that law of Polarity is working so
strongly that they are always undecided
as to what they shall do. It is not because
they cannot decide, for THEY CAN DECIDE,
but because they are so subject to that law of
Polarity, so one with it, that whenever they
make a decision, immediately there arises
the silent opposition which makes them
change their decision, and take another one.
As soon as they have taken that new decision,
the old one comes up again, and so on, until
by an effort of will power, they keep to one.
Take people who have what is called the
189
spirit of contradiction. Whenever we begin
a conversation with them, they must always
contradict what we say. They like to argue,
because of the law of Polarity. They argue
sometimes against their own convictions.
They cannot help it.
We can try them with a little experiment,
which shows how the law of Polarity is
working. When they start to argue, concentrate
for a few moments and silently
deny the law, deny its power, and affirm
Unity, Harmony, so as to cast the weight
into the scale of the positive. Then probably
the individual, instead of continuing to
argue, will say, "What is the use of arguing?"
There we have not only a good example of
how to get the best of somebody's spirit of
contradiction, but also, and what is more
important, of how to overcome the law back
of it. And when we do that, we must not
say, even mentally, to the individual that
he is not going to argue; that mental process
must be done within ourselves impersonally,
entirely forgetting about the person who
does the arguing.
Action and re-action is another manifestation
of the same law. When people have
been going for some time in one direction
and have reached a certain limit, they turn
suddenly back and go in the opposite
direction, to return again to the first one,
and so on indefinitely.
That is especially noticeable in all kinds
of religious, scientific or political move190
ments. After a great spiritual uplift, the
people get very realistic; after a very
materialistic age, the people again are seeking
something spiritual. The reason why it
is so difficult sometimes to work in certain
directions, is because with each step one
takes forward, there is that tendency to go
backward, due to the law of Polarity, in
connection with which usually operates also
the so-called law of Rhythm.
Students of psychology know well that
peculiarity of the human character. Yet
that characteristic of most human beings is
not an integral part of them; it is but the
law of Polarity expressing itself through
human channels, who, in most cases, not
knowing how to rise above that law, become
helpless tools in its hands. Therefore, it is
very important for us to study, to analyze
that law and to learn how to master it.
The law of Polarity was first brought down
into Involution by Mind itself; it is its creation,
its own child. Later on, however,
that law grew so strong that it subdued its
own creator, and became one of the most
relentless of masters. It has taken possession
of the two planes, the physical and the
mental; from there it governs the world with
a rod of iron; but we can, and, with the help
of the Great Law, WE WILL, some day, overcome
that law of Polarity and be free again.
191
THE LAW OF RHYTHM: EVERYTHING
IN THE WORLD, IN THE PRESENT STATE
OF HUMAN CONSCIOUSNESS, INHALES
AND EXHALES, GOES UP AND DOWN BY
COMPENSATED OSCILLATIONS.
This law is also called the law of the
Pendulum, because its operations are in a
way similar to the swinging of the pendulum.
The pendulum goes up one side, down again,
up again, and so on. That law operates in
our life on two planes, the physical and the
mental, in many different ways. To start
with, its functioning on the physical,
material plane will be explained. This is
especially noticeable in waves during a storm
on the sea or on any other body of water
where waves are brought forth by a storm.
The following design shows how the energy
of the wave is directed by that law.
The upward and forward movement of
energy carries the wave higher and higher,
until it reaches a culminate point. Then
comes a moment when, through its own
weight, the wave breaks down and falls,
seemingly to continue again its forward and
upward movement. That is only an appearance,
however. In reality, the energy which
has raised that wave, after it has reached its
highest point, does not proceed at all the
192
way it seems to. ['he law of Rhythm entirely
reverses its movement. After it has reached
the culminate point it suddenly turns within
and goes all the way down and backward
until it reaches the farthest point back, the
point where it started its forward movement.
And when it has reached the farthest
and lowest point, then it starts to go up
again, first under the water as an invisible,
propulsory force, then appearing on the
surface again as a wave, to reach its climax
and then start hack again under the water.
A certain part of its forward movement is
done on the surface as a wave, but all its
backward movement, and a part of its forward
movement, are done under the water,
unseen but still most strongly operating.
That is how the waves of the ocean are
moving. Every swimmer knows that undercurrent;
it is called the undertow, which is
so dangerous because it sucks in. But how
few realize that it is all due to the operation,
on the physical plane, of the law of Rhythm.
on the physical plane, so also does the
law of Rhythm operate on the mental plane,
because in both instances it is governed by
the one immutable Great Law. We, who
consciously live on these two planes, are
under that law of Rhythm as long as we
have not learned how to rise above it.
As are the waves on the ocean, so is
Humanity's Evolution. It goes forward and
upwards until it reaches the highest point,
then begins the decline into its backward
193
movement. It goes down with ever increasing
speed until it reaches its lowest and
farthest point, from which it starts its climb
again.
As we see the energy of the ocean moving
partly on the surface of the water as a wave,
partly under the water as the undertow,
so it is also with Humanity's Evolution.
The progress of Humanity begins to be
noticeable only when the law of Rhythm
becomes apparent in social life, just like
the visible waves on the ocean, the beginning
of whose ascending movement remains unseen
under the water, until it bursts forth
as a visible wave. But all the important
work was really done, so to say, in the
secrecy of the ocean itself. The silent, unseen
progress is due to the hidden forward
movement.
When the backward movement starts,
at first it is almost unnoticeable, but its
speed increases all the time until it has
reached the lowest point. There again, as
in the ocean, the backward movement is
not so much seen as felt. On the surface
things seem to be still moving forward, but
there is the undertow, which sucks in and
down all those who are not strong enough to
resist that backward and downward movement.
The backward movement is so
strong as to bring Humanity almost to the
same point from which it started, and the
little gain still made is due exclusively to
the operation of another law called the Law
194
of Evolution, which in some measure counteracts
the operation of the law of Rhythm.
If we would express in mathematical
figures the advancing movement of the
Human Race, and then its receding movement,
due to that law, they would read as
follows: In the forward movement, Humanity
has in its progress advanced, metaphorically
speaking, twelve feet, but when the backward
movement starts, the law of Rhythm
throws Humanity back eleven feet, eleven
and three-quarter inches, and the whole
progress is thus reduced to one-quarter of an
inch, That is the reason why Humanity's
Evolution is so very slow. We have lived
countless ages and yet we have progressed
comparatively very little, all because of that
law of Rhythm. If it were not for that law,
which keeps it back, Humanity would long
ago have solved its problems of Evolution.
That law would have kept humanity for
eternity in its clutches, if there were not the
Law of Evolution, which states that “ALL
VIBRATIONS TEND NATURALY TO RISE
UPWARDS IN THE SCALE OF ETERNAL
HARMONY." That Law is a ray of Hope,
sent by Love to suffering Humanity to
uplift it, to counteract to some extent the
operation of the law of Rhythm. Because
of that Law of Evolution we see all vibrations
always striving upwards in spite of the law of
Rhythm working continually against it.
It will be explained now how that law of
Rhythm works in our daily lives. Most of
195
us have had the experience that there are
certain days when everything is successful
and other days when anything we start is a
failure. It is the upward and downward
movement of the law of Rhythm which produces
these differences. It must he remembered
that as there are big waves on the
ocean, there are also smaller waves. Each
big wave is made up of smaller ones, and
each little wave is governed by the same law
and manifests the same kind of movement,
forward and backward, as does the big wave,
the law of Rhythm working in identically
the same way on all waves.
Men of business also know that law,
sometimes consciously, most of the time unconsciously.
There are certain periods in
their business when things go well, and
periods when things do not go well. Those
periods are sometimes long, sometimes short,
just like waves on the ocean, and they repeat
themselves. In History certain facts also
continually repeat themselves and we then
say: "History repeats itself." It is the law
of Rhythm which is the underlying cause of
those forward and backward movements.
People who have been successful in their life
are those who have mastered that law; that
is, they acted like good swimmers on a stormy
sea. When the law started to draw them
back, they did not lose courage or begin
to fear; on the contrary, again like good
swimmers, they courageously did their best
not only to remain afloat on the top of the
196
wave, but to swim so vigorously as to
advance even in spite of the opposing current,
until by and by, at each attempt, they
won some point. The result was that finally
those waves, instead of drawing them backward,
really began to carry them onwards.
Sometimes it may be a slower, other times
a quicker, movement, but it will always be a
forward movement. There is no longer any
backward movement possible. Under those
conditions, when it happens on the water
of the sea, we say the storm is over. When
it happens in our life, we say we have
mastered unsuccess --we are successful. If
one analyzes the lives of most successful
people, no matter to what department of
life they may belong, be it Religion,
Science, Business, Statesmanship, Arts or
Politics, one will find that any man or
woman who has ever been successful has
had the same experience. In the beginning,
great hardships, handicaps and failures, yet
they persevered, failing maybe hundreds of
times, but advancing still, full of energy,
arid still hoping that some day they would
meet with success. One day they did meet
with success, and that day they neutralized
that law to the extent that we humanly can
in our present state of consciousness. Even
then that law can bring them a little down
but still it always remains a forward movement.
Now there is the question, how to neutralize
that law and take advantage of its for197
ward and upward movements. The first
thing to do when we see that the law of
Rhythm is carrying us backwards is not to
fear, not to be discouraged, and to try to
swim as vigorously as we can against the
opposing current. Even if, in spite of our
efforts, we are carried far back and deep
down, after all it does not matter how much
backwards we are carried by the law; the
important point which we must always keep
in mind is that some day, because it is the
law of Rhythm, it must start again its forward
and ascending movement. Being a
law, it must be true to itself. Therefore,
even at its worst, there is always a hope for
us that we will leave the bottom some day,
if we will persevere, and if we do not let
ourselves be discouraged and remain on the
bottom like a stone which cannot be carried
forward by the ascending movement of the
law. That is why we say that "a man may
be down but not out." When the bottom is
reached, then the ascending movement
starts, and finally the highest point is
reached. Wise people know that then is
the time to be careful. We can master the
law, yet we must watch it till we have really
overcome it. That does not mean to fear the
law, but to be cautious, and when we see the
backward movement starting again, to
polarize ourselves on the positive and
simply refuse to be carried back, like a good
swimmer fighting the undertow.
When the law of Rhythm begins its
198
backward movement, we must persevere in
what we already have on hand, because it is
our duty to hold on to that; but we must
never start anything new once the backward
movement has set in. It usually
turns out to be a failure. Naturally, if one
can stand through the backward movement
till it has reached its very lowest point, then
some day one may become successful; hut
why waste all that energy in order to fight.
the backward movement? when it is much
easier and more rational to wait for the
ascending movement of the law. Success
will come then by simply waiting for the
positive operation of the law. Thus we
will have saved all the energy which otherwise
would have been wasted in fighting,
and then we can use it to better advantage
in combining it with the forward movement
of the law of Rhythm.
In our lives we all have periods of success
and periods of unsuccess, due to the operation
of that law. Therefore, whenever we
see that we are on the way to success, we
must DO ALL WE CAN during that time in
order to take in every direction every
possible advantage of the positive side of
the law of Rhythm. That law is an automatic,
unconscious law, but WE ARE
CONSCIOUS. We can, therefore, outwit the
law, and we have for that the divine
authority and help, because it is a transitory
law which we must some day overcome.
Like the law of Polarity, it originated when
199
our involution into material consciousness
started, and it will disappear when we will
have evolved out of that state of consciousness.
Take, for instance, that story in the
Bible, the dream of Pharaoh about the seven
fat cows and the seven lean cows which ate
up the seven fat cows and still remained
lean. It was the law of Rhythm which the
Pharaoh perceived in a dream and which
Joseph was able to interpret correctly.
Joseph was wise. He knew the operation of
the law of Rhythm and how to overcome it
and so he said: "During the seven prosperous
years gather and bring together all you can.
That is, use the upward movement of the law
of Rhythm to the very limit in every direction;
and then when you will have received
all which can be obtained during those
seven prosperous years, when the years of
famine, or the backward movement, will
start, you will have everything ready to
meet that backward movement, and being
prepared, you will thus overcome the law.
We should and can do just the same and
follow the example of the Pharaoh. When
the forward movement of the law of Rhythm
starts, let us use its power in every possible
direction. No matter what we will endeavor
to do during that time, it is bound to be a
success, but when the backward movement
starts again, then we must be careful,
watch, and refuse to be carried away by
that movement. The more we act that way,
the more and more do we neutralize that
200
law, and by and by we will notice that those
backward movements will become weaker
and weaker till they will disappear entirely,
leaving only the forward movements. When
we have reached that condition, the storm
on the sea of our lives will come to an end
and we can say we have mastered that law
of Rhythm; the negative operation of it will
cease, leaving only the positive forcer which
then will help us all the time. The following
design shows how the law of Rhythm operates
when consciously mastered.
It is very necessary for us to know those
laws and their operation because we are
seemingly so helpless when confronted with
them. People become so frightened by
their manifestations that they grow superstitious.
Somebody says: "How well you
look," or, "How successful you are in your
business?" Immediately most people would
tap wood. Why? To counteract so called
negative influences. The superstition that
we must tap wood was really brought on
because people noticed that whenever a
compliment about their good health or
success was made, soon some misfortune
happened to the one who was complimented.
Back of all that trouble are those two
transitory laws, the law of Polarity and the
law of Rhythm. Many superstitions were
brought forth to meet those laws, but in
reality they were never able to do so. It is
201
only our mental attitude, the knowledge of
the operation of the laws, and faith in our
God-given power to overcome them, which
enable us to master those laws.
LAW OP GENDER: EVERYTHING IN
THIS WORLD IN THE PRESENT STATE OF
HUMAN CONSCIOUSNESS HAS TWO GEN-
DERS, THE MALE AND THE FEMALE
GENDER.
The law of Gender expresses itself most
forcibly throughout the whole round of
Creation in the so-called opposite sexes,
the male and the female. It is manifested
not only through human beings, but also
through animals, plants, minerals, electrons,
electrical and magnetic currents, etc. Not
only on the physical plane does that law of
Gender function; it is also manifested in the
mind of each human being, be it man or
woman. They have the two genders expressed
also in their mental selves. The
mind of each individual has a Self-conscious-
ness which belongs to the male gender, and a
Sub-consciousness which belongs to the
female gender. These two are definitely
expressing two sides of our individual minds.
As the most important part of the process
of thought operation is based on the law of
Gender in the human mind, details about it
will be given in the sixth lesson, which deals
with Mind Force.
202
There is also a third constituent part in
our mental selves, called the Super-con-
sciousness, which will be taken up in the
seventh lesson.
In this lesson the law of Gender will be
explained in its operation through the fundamental
characteristics of what we call, in
our present state of consciousness, the two
opposite sexes. We have now in Humanity,
on one side Man, and on the other side
Woman, and these two are like two halves of
a sphere, which, when they come together,
combine to form a whole sphere. The
generally accepted belief of today is that
they unite for the purpose of procreation,
to continue the human species on this Earth.
No matter how important procreation may
appear, a still greater and higher purpose is
there for them to achieve. That ultimate
purpose is that by learning their lessons
through association, and by mutually developing
their latent complementary qualities,
they may work out completeness within
each, after which they are automatically
separated. Yet after their separation they
are no longer the same as they were before.
A great change has taken place within them.
Before their meeting, they appeared as
halves, hut after the object of their association
has been attained, they separate
because each one of them has become a
COMPLETE SPHERE, In Man, who is the
outward expression of the male qualities,
which are energy, self reliance, intellect,
203
etc., are also latent and ready tar expression
all the female qualities. On the other hand
love, patience, intuition, gentleness, etc.,
latent in men, whenever expressed as dominant
qualities, manifest themselves in what
we call Woman. Yet women have also
latent within them all male qualities. This
is so not only in the character of the individuals,
but also in their physical bodies.
For instance, the embryo of a child, until
about the fifth month of gestation, has the
two sexes within itself physically expressed.
Yet afterwards it develops one sex or the
other, and thus determines the sex to which
it is born, boy or girl. Yet within the body
of human beings are still discernible traces
of the opposite sex. As it is with our physical
bodies, so it is with our characters, and from
each individual can be drawn out and developed
the latent complementary parts of their
characters. The main purpose of marriage and
in general of the association of men and women
is therefore to work out that development,
to make them complete individual spheres,
the image and likeness of the Infinite Sphere,
called the Great Principle, the Absolute.
In the first chapter of Genesis we read, "And
God created Man in His image and likeness:
male and female created He them." Only a
being possessing both qualities referred to
can be the perfect image and likeness of the
Perfect One. That is the goal toward
which each step in Humanity's Evolution is
bringing us daily nearer and nearer.
204
The following diagrams show three pairs
of halves, each half representing a man and
a woman placed in a certain juxtaposition
one to another, and forming three distinct
groups. The whole of human relations can
be classed under those three main headings.
Yet each case is an individual one, and there
are no two alike. The first pair shows the
two halves, man and woman, directly facing
205
each other, thus establishing between them
as many connecting lines of Attraction, or
Love, as their open surfaces allow. When
in that relation, there is an irresistible drawing
from one to another which unites them
into a complete sphere. It may happen
sometimes instantaneously, when two individuals
chance to bc in that relation one to
another. It is then called "love at first
sight." When the two seemingly become
one, everything seems to he in common
between them-common interests, a common
axis about which their lives rotate. And
when individuals are in that condition, they
feel such an overwhelming sense of completeness
and harmony that they call it perfect
bliss, and because of it would never like to
part even for a moment. The slightest
separation causes them intense suffering,
because of the lack of the complementary
part. It is like an open wound when they
are put apart, and they are only happy when
they are again together. And they expect
to remain in that condition not only throughout
this life but even throughout Eternity.
When two individuals are in that relation
to one another they are harmless, but also
useless, to the rest of the world. They cannot
help it. All their interests are centered
within themselves. Most of their energies
are used to keep those two halves together,
the man to meet the demands of the woman,
the woman to meet the demands of the man.
They live in a world of their own and are
206
happy. The world around them does not
exist for them. Naturally in such a case
they cannot express anything outside of
themselves, and therefore one of the fundamental
Laws of the Universe, the Law of
Attraction, cannot operate outside of them
as it should, for the Law of Attraction must
be operating outside as well as inside in
order to keep everything in perfect equilibrium
and harmony. If the whole Universe
would he filled with compound spheres of
the above kind, nothing would be flowing
from one sphere to another, each being
centered in itself; and the Universe, deprived
of the cohesive power of Attraction, would
fall to pieces. But the Great Law takes good
care that such a condition shall be only
transitory, and nothing but a stepping stone
to work out higher problems. When the
two halves, man and woman, combine into
a sphere, those halves apparently fit each
other completely, but that is not the case.
There is always some little space between
them where they are not completely adjusted.
Compared with the great harmonization of
the other qualities, that little maladjustment
is almost unnoticed by them; yet in
that little space where they seemingly do
not accord, and which forms a sort of a
vacuum, the latent complementary parts of
each are growing in, because Nature does
not permit a vacuum. The manifested male
qualities of the man draw out of the woman
her latent male qualities, because the law
207
says that "like attracts like." And the
manifested female qualities of the woman,
in their turn, draw out of the man his latent
female qualities. Thus two incipient halves
are gradually growing out in that open space
between the two. The more they grow, the
more independent of each other the two
individuals become. This process of development
is unfolding so gradually that neither
of them notices the change in their relations
one to another until they have become two
complete spheres rotating around their
respective axes, independent and free, yet
still most intimately related one to another.
Then only do they realize that some fundamental
change has taken place within them,
and their opened eyes perceive with amazement
that they have grown into a new and
higher condition. Their association has
achieved its purpose; the law has been fulfilled.
Two complete beings have been
evolved from a half-developed condition,
and brought to the Universe TO COOPERATE
CONSCIOUSLY IN THE GREAT ETERNAL
SCHEME.
But a question may arise, Is all that love,
that tender relation between them, gone
once and forever? No! By no means. On
the contrary, never before did they feel a
greater sense of love, a more intense feeling
of completeness and harmony, than since
they became complete individual spheres.
When they were halves, they could express
one to another only the love of a half, but
208
the moment they became complete spheres
they expressed complete love to each other
in all its infinite manifestations. Being
complete spheres, and rotating around their
own individual axes, they continually see
one another in all their different aspects.
It is like incessantly discovering in each other
some new and precious qualities. Naturally,
under those conditions, their love becomes
infinitely greater and more perfect than' it
had ever been before. On account of their
completeness they must also radiate love
to everyone and everything about them in
every direction, thus fulfilling the Law of
Love, of Universal Brotherhood. Then they
become useful members of the Great Human
Family, because they love everybody, only
they will love their mate more, because
their relations are at the time the closest, one
to another. That is why they are called
mates, or affinities, or twin souls. But their
mutual love by no means excludes love to
other beings also. Through incarnation
after incarnation we have all been working
out that problem of ours, by gradually
developing our inner qualities. Usually,
when two individuals are in that position
facing each other, as described above, it is
due to previous incarnations which prepared
them for that relation. That is why, when
they meet, they cannot help but love each
other. When two such individuals have
worked out their completeness, and reached
a state of individual spheres, they do not
209
Think any more of their own happiness. All
Their life, all their thoughts, all their love, is
For their mate’s or their friend’s happiness.
They are never expecting anything in return,
but, being complete spheres, it is inevitable
that they should receive in return as much
as they give. It is the highest love we can
imagine now in our present state of consciousness,
because it is a love which loves,
not for what it can get, but for what it can
give. It is the nearest to the love of
Divinity, for Divinity also gives first, then
Receives. God first loved us; that is why we,
in our turn, are to love Him. Even bodily
separation or death cannot break such ties
once they are established.
Diagram number two shows another
group, much less harmonious, but much more
common. There the man loves the women
who does not reciprocate his love because
her affections are fixed up on another man,
who, in his turn, is indifferent to her.
Under these circumstances it is much more
difficult to work out the completion,
because there is no help whatsoever from
the side of the corresponding party. Still,
the problem of completion is solved, but in a
different way. First the man, not having
the woman’s manifested qualities directed
toward him to awaken within him the latent
qualities of love and gentleness, has to
draw out of himself, through his own efforts,
stimulated by his love, the complementary
female qualities. Love does it. More and
210
more, because of the woman he loves, all the
latent female qualities, as love, patience,
gentleness, intuition, etc., are brought out
of that man by his love. It is a slow and
painful process, because he has to do it
alone, without the help of the woman he
loves. Yet he does it, because he loves.
When he has worked out his completion,
his whole attitude toward that woman
changes. In the beginning it was selfish;
but the more he loves, the less selfish he
becomes. At first he suffered because his
love was not answered, and was jealous of
the other man to whom that woman was
giving her love. The completeness once
attained, all these negative feelings disappear
entirely, because he has found harmony
within himself. Then he no longer thinks
of his own happiness; he finds his happiness
in the happiness of the woman he loves. No
sacrifice is too great for him, for he is a
changed being.
There is the woman, in love with another
man, who is indifferent to her. She has also
to work out the problem of her completion
without the help and assistance of the man
she loves. Through love again is that
problem solved. Her own love makes her
more self-reliant. and energetic, compels her
to make greater use of her reasoning qualities,
etc. And thus, through much hard
work, sorrow, and trouble, she becomes
eventually a complete sphere. Then her
whole attitude changes. She begins to feel
211
toward the unresponsive object of her love a
mother's affection, caring for him without
ever expecting to get anything in return,
entirely forgetting her own self for his sake.
She also is then ready for any sacrifice,
because she has worked out her completion.
And when the two, the first man and
woman, have become complete spheres,
their mutual relations are then also modified.
To their surprise they discover that bonds of
love exist from both sides. They become
friends, and the woman who spurned,
perhaps for many years, the love which the
man lavished upon her in such measure,
begins in her turn to love him also. Why
that sudden change? Because, as a complete
sphere, she cannot help but love
everybody; and that first man, perhaps her
husband, being so close to her, naturally
must get the radiations of love emanating
from her in every direction.
The third group represents two individuals,
a man and a woman, who are married,
yet turn their backs upon each other.
Worldly considerations were probably the
cause of their loveless marriage; or maybe it
was a match arranged by their parents, who
did not consult the personal feelings of the
two chiefly concerned. Such a marriage
must be an unhappy one, and an utter
failure in regard to the problem of working
out their own individual completeness. It
is one of the most inharmonious of human
relations, because it is unnatural, the Law
212
of Attraction, the Basic Law of the Universe,
not finding expression in their mutual
relations. They are of no use one to
another, as they are turning their backs to
each other. Yet, as the problem of completion
must be worked out also in that
case, they are seeking an affinity, a love,
outside of their matrimonial ties. And when
they have found somebody to love they
separate, because they realize that otherwise
happiness would remain for them a mere
dream. Because of worldly considerations,
it may take them many years before they
make that final decision, yet it is inevitable.
Soon or late it must come, and the sooner
the better.
That last group teaches human beings a
great lesson, that marriage is there to build
the character, to develop Love to its highest
manifestation, and not to attain material
ease and comfort.
The problem of Completion is continually
worked out in life through association of
individuals one with another. Women constantly
contribute to men some of their
qualities, and men do the same toward
women. That is why co-education has so
many strong points in its favor. Even the
association of individuals of the same sex
has also its own beneficial results. Especially
large educational, social, and military
bodies play a very important role in that
respect. There, individuals belonging to
different classes in social life come together,
213
each one contributing some characteristic,
some quality, to their fellow beings. Angles I
are rounded off, rough surfaces made
smooth, and individuals promoted a few
degrees further toward completion.
COMPLETION IS PERFECTION, and as
such is a very wonderful thing to seek
and to strive for. But we must also realize
that a problem of that magnitude cannot
be worked out by individuals in the span
of one life. Many returns to Earth, many
reincarnations, are needed for each one of
us before we become perfect beings, the
image and likeness of that Supreme Being,
the Source of all Perfection, Whom we call
God.
THE LAW OF CAUSE AND EFFECT
EVERY EFFECT HAS ITS CAUSE AND EVERY
CAUSE HAS ITS EFFECT.
This law pervades the three planes, the
physical, mental, and Spiritual. It is a
law which has its root in the Spiritual plane
because there is the First Great Cause, the
Principle, the Basis of everything. But
there also is the effect, the Universe. On
the Spiritual plane, cause and effect are
simultaneous and instantaneous; there they
are so blended together that they cannot
be separated; but on the other planes there
is always a certain time, a period of space
214
between cause and effect, due to the human
concept, in our present state of consciousness,
of Time and Space. That law is
operating in this way; every time we start
something, be it thought, word, or action,
we create a certain cause which will some day
materialize in a corresponding effect. If we
start a positive cause, a right cause, there
will be in due time a positive effect, and vice
versa. Just when that effect will take place,
no one can tell; it depends upon many
circumstances; but it is unavoidably due,
like a logical result in a mathematical
problem. Whenever we have started a
cause, we are powerless over its effect, can
never change the effect. Yet human beings
do not realize that at all, as is indicated in
the common belief that if people will regret
their sins, they will be forgiven and ushered
into Heaven. That is an utter impossibility
because it is against the Law. if a person
regrets a mistake, a sin, it is forgiven in the
sense that there is always the possibility to
make it right, to start a new positive cause.
But the penalty for the wrong is also always
there, and that penalty it is impossible
to avoid because it is our own creation, the
effect of the cause we started coming back to
us. And there we have the explanation of
those words of Jesus in the Bible, when he
said: "WHOSOEVER SOWETH THE WIND
SHALL REAP THE WHIRLWIND." He knew
the law of Cause and Effect and He stated
it, but naturally He could not explain that
215
law to the people who were living at that
period as scientifically as it can be explained
now. He presented it in another way. He
used the allegorical form, yet it was the
same law. When we know that law and
apply that knowledge to our daily life, we
can shape our own destiny exactly as we
wish it. Naturally we CANNOT straighten
out past mistakes, hut we CAN TAKE THEM
AS LESSONS.
When those mistakes, those negative
causes, materialize into our lives as negative
effects, those who are wise profit by the
experience of their mistakes, which then
become for them good lessons not to repeat
those mistakes. In order to use that law
successfully in our lives, we must learn to
handle it properly. The first and most
important thing to do is TO LIVE IN THE
EVER PRESENT NOW. What does that
mean? Are we not living right now? Yes
and no. To live in the present NOW means
always to do the best we can to start right
causes NOW. Illogical and impractical as
it is, yet most people live in the Future, with
their hopes pinned to that Future. On the
other hand, some people live with the
remembrance of the Past; they are tied to
their dead Past. That also is not living
NOW. "NOW is the appointed time," do we
read in the sacred Books. NIOW we must do
everything which is to be done; NOW is the
very wonderful and only moment for us to
live in-a moment which very often is not
216
at all understood by some, even of the great
philosophers. They entirely disregard the
NOW. They claim that NOW does not exist
because everything continually changes, is in
a condition of perpetual becoming, and that
therefore it can never be NOW, but is either
the Past or the Future. If that were really
so, we could never use constructively the
laws of Cause and Effect, as the Future
would be always beyond our control.
Therefore we would never be able consciously
to build and direct our lives; we would
always bc slaves of Fate. In living NOW,
in performing NOW our duties as they come
to us, we place ourselves in the following
position. We are, so to speak, standing on a
line of demarcation, on one side of us the
Past, on the other side the Future, and in
front of us the Present. In the Past we
have experience, in the Future all possibilities,
but NOW is the time for us to act, to
plant the good seed, to start positive causes,
taking advantage of lessons of the Past so
as to create the Future we desire. Some day
TOMORROW will become TODAY, the
Future will become Present, as time is
moving along. We alone are immovable in
that ever present NOW. Events are passing
before our eyes as a film on a screen. It
is the film of our own life which we witness
NOW. We are both the audience and the
actors, and our state of consciousness is the
screen on which we perceive everything.
NOW is so marvelous because we perform in
217
it simultaneously two actions; we reap the
Past and sow the Future. These two actions
we can perform continually only NOW. That
is why NOW is so important and why NOW
holds for us the key to our destiny. The
Past cannot be changed; we have to take it
as it is. But our Future is completely in
our hands, and, if we start the right causes,
should never occasion us any worry, as it
will take care of. itself because of the law of
Cause and Effect. When Jesus said: "Take
therefore no thought for the morrow, for
the morrow will take thought for the things
of itself; sufficient unto the day is the evil
thereof," He meant that we must NOW do
the right thing and then the Future will take
care of itself because of the law. It is unavoidable
and yet we realize it so little that
we continually worry about the Future.
Whenever we do anything, we wonder?
"How will it come out?" Why should we
worry? If we do the right thing, leave it
alone and it will come out all right, through
the operation of the law of Cause and Effect.
Worry is a leak through which energy is
wastefully dissipated in the unknown void
of the Future instead of being constructively
applied in the Present. We can perform
real action only on the plane on which we
are living NOW in body, mind, and Soul.
For the Great Principle, there is only one
plane, that of the EVER PPESENT NOW.
There is no Past or Future for the Absolute,
because It is all-inclusive, and when we
218
reach the highest state of consciousness there
will be the most complete sense of the EVER
PRESENT NOW, as Past and Future will be
One with it. In the Bhagavad-Gita, Krishna
is recorded as saying: "Do not think about
the fruit of your action; but perform action."
That is the same as when Jesus told us not
to worry about the next day. Do the right
thing today and the next day will take care
of itself. That does not mean that we should
cease planning. Naturally we should plan
things; but when we plan them as well as
we can, when we have prepared the seed, if
we have prepared a good seed and planted
it rightly, it will grow well. Never worry
about the result; there is the law back of it.
That is why we must be satisfied with today
and not try to imagine or make certain
calculations that it will work out this or
that way. Usually our calculations will be
upset because in worrying about the Future
we do not give enough attention to the
Present. We cannot have the Great Law
operating in the Future, the Great Law
being a Law of the ever present NOW.
Neither the Past nor the Future can exist
for that Great Law, because, like the Great
Principle Itself, it is an all-embracing Law,
and is therefore always operating NOW.
We make certain mistakes periodically,
and then say, "Next time I am not going to
do that," but when next time comes we do it
again. Why? Because of that law of Cause
and Effect. Each time we make a mistake
219
we start a new cause for that mistake to be
repeated, and usually, if we watch these
periodical mistakes, we can see that we
make them at certain times or in meeting a
certain kind of people, or on being confronted
with certain similar conditions. So whenever
we feel that moment approaching and
the ground begins to be slippery, there we
have to watch, and, being determined not to
yield to that mistake again, we will, through
the conscious application of that law of
Cause and Effect, destroy the negative
causes and stop the repetition of the negative
effects. Instead, we have started a positive
cause which will some day culminate in a
positive effect. If we keep to that decision
to overcome imperfections, the law will
carry us through with harmonious results,
and we will be able to correct by and by all
our mistakes. They will never occur again
because we are setting up new causes, harmonious
causes, which will be then continually
expressed in corresponding new effects.
On our life paths we very often stumble,
we may even fall, yet we should never
worry about our stumbling or our falling.
We should always bear in mind that it does
not matter so much that we have fallen over
an obstacle. The important fact is that
we are on the other side of the obstacle,
that we have advanced in spite of it. This
is the main point to be always remembered
by us, and then the fall itself will not appear
to be so hard.
220
The law of Cause and Effect, in its
present aspect of a transitory, material law,
is not harmful to us if we know how to use it
properly. If we only do the right thing we
can use it in such a way that it will always
work with positive results. That law explains
also what is called Reincarnation. Why do
some individuals come to this Earth to
suffer and others to enjoy? If for some
reason they could not get all they deserved
for their good or evil deeds in one incarnation,
in one life on Earth, then they must
come back to this plane again in order to
get it in another life. In other words, they
come to this Earth as children go to school;
it is indeed the School of Life, where all
lessons must be learned and all mistakes
corrected. Then only are we ready for some
higher and greater work. This explanation
is the only logical one which completely
does away with that seeming injustice in
the destiny of human beings. In any ease,
it certainly is more acceptable than the
theory of eternal bliss and eternal punishment.
This last law of Cause and Effect closes
the cycle of the Seven Laws. Two more
Laws will be given, making nine, the Law
of Love and the Law of Evolution. These
Laws, although direct emanations from, and
comprehended in, the first of the Laws of
the Absolute, are given separately, at the
end of this lesson on Laws, in order to
emphasize the fact that no matter how
221
strong the Negative, with its transitory
laws, may appear to us, the Positive, with
its Eternal Laws, is nevertheless supreme.
It is the Beginning and the End of everything.
THE LAW OF LOVE: NO MATTER UNDER
WHAT CIRCUMTACE, ALWAYS MEET
EVERYTHING AND EVERYBODY WITH
LOVE.
All great teachers of Humanity have
always had their teachings based on Love.
They loved human beings, and they taught
human beings how to love. People usually
see in those teachings only the emotional,
the altruistic, the ideal, yet how few realize
the immense practical value and the real
science back of them. Let us analyze now,
from the scientific point of view, why the
continual application of that Law is one of
the most important means for our evolution.
We have an immutable Law which says
"Everything is Vibration," and therefore
Love also is a certain kind of vibration. But
so is hatred, jealousy, etc. Suppose an
individual sends to us a negative thought
vibration of hatred or jealousy. That unit
of negative vibrations penetrates into us,
and because of the Law of Vibration,
arouses in us the corresponding unit of
negative vibrations. Having in us two units
of negative vibrations, we feel uncomfort222
able, and we throw them back to the individual
who first sent to us the thought of
hatred or jealousy. Again because of the
Law of Vibration, they arouse in that
individual two corresponding negative vibrations.
He in his turn, disliking to feel four
units of negative thought vibrating within
him, throws them back at us. Receiving
this time four negative units, which arouse
within us a corresponding four, we send
back eight. He gets eight, and sends back
to us sixteen. We, on our side, return him
thirty-two, etc., the number of units of
negative vibrations exchanged increasing
thus in geometrical progression. When both
sides have reached the limit of endurance
in that direction they explode; that is, they
suddenly throw off all the negative vibrations
accumulated in each one of them, and
that explosion means fight. The fight may
be with acts, with words, with looks, or
even with thoughts. In any case, it is a
fight, which results in injury to both sides.
That is the ordinary way, among human
beings, of eliminating their negative vibra-
tions-certainly not a practical way, after
all, because it always weakens both parties,
and sometimes injures them beyond repair.
That proves that retaliation, as stated in
the law of Moses, which says "An eye for an
eye and a tooth for a tooth," and which is so
generally accepted by human beings, is not
the best method of solving that problem.
Now, whenever we apply the Law of Love
223
in a similar case, we obtain there entirely
different results. An individual may send
to us negative vibrations, thoughts of
hatred and jealousy. According to the
Law of Vibration, they will arouse in us the
corresponding negative vibrations. Yet if
we remember the Law of Love, we can meet
those negative vibrations with Love, consciously
brought forth within us. As the
Positive always destroys the Negative,
which has no power over it, the positive
vibrations always destroy the negative
vibrations sent from that individual. After
they have destroyed these negative vibrations,
they reach the individual himself,
and arouse within him the corresponding
vibrations of love. Though surprised at the
way we retaliated, the individual may send
us another discharge of negative vibrations,
which we meet again in the same way. And
again the positive vibrations of Love proceeding.
from us will do their pacifying work
within the other individual. He may send
a few more discharges of negative vibrations,
the number of which will depend on
the strength of the negative passion which
is governing him at that time. But we,
meeting them always with Love, finally
destroy all the reserves of the negative
vibrations which the individual possesses at
that moment. And the individual, because of
the Law of Love, begins to feel in their
stead peace and harmony, and sometimes
even love. All the negative seems as if
224
wiped out, and replaced by the positive.
Often the individual, out of stubbornness,
does not want to admit it, because he thinks
that by so doing he acknowledges defeat;
but in reality there was no defeat whatsoever,
on either side. On the contrary, Love
carried the victory to both.
The above cited example shows how
infinitely superior and more practical is
Love than retaliation, yet how few people
realize its practicability and its universal
use. They consider it a weakness, a lack
of manliness, not to strike back when they
are struck. On the contrary, it is much
more difficult, and requires greater self
control and more developed will power, to
stand those continual attacks of negative
vibrations, and to meet and overcome them
by vibrations of Love. The more we apply
that Law of Love in our lives, the stronger
we become on our positive side, and the
greater is the harmony within us, until
finally we reach a condition of such harmony
that no negative vibration of any kind can
ever touch us more because there is no
longer in us a response to anything negative.
Then only everything positive will come to
us. Each human being will some day have
to learn that Law of Love, because it is the
only way, the quickest and the easiest, to
do away with wars, revolutions, strikes,
domestic troubles, and all kinds of disagreements
and misunderstandings among human
beings. Then peace will be established on
225
this Earth, not as something imposed from
without by a stronger nation, but as something
from within, an inherent part of each
human being. And as nations are made up
of individuals, when the individual will be
able to express peace and good will toward
other men, nations will then manifest on a
large scale what each citizen does on a small
scale. Then the whole Human Family
will be at peace, and peace will reign on this
Earth. How true, how scientific, ring down
to us through the centuries those loving
words of the One Who was Love, "LOVE
YOUR ENEMIES, BLESS THEM THAT HATE
YOU, DO GOOD TO THEM THAT DESPITE-
EIJLLY USE YOU"
Those who have attained the highest on
the path of Love, when they reach that
condition where nothing but love comes to
them from everywhere and from everybody,
are then ready for the final test of Love.
Jealousy, hatred, malice, all evil passions,
are thrown at them again, but this time not
to awaken within them the corresponding
characteristics which no longer vibrate
within them. All negative, all evil, comes
to them for liberation from its own self
for transmutation into good. The Life
Energy, pure and harmonious, imprisoned
as in a shell in every negative act, thought,
or emotion, is irresistibly attracted toward
those who are the luminaries of Love.
Unconsciously it feels that only they are
great enough to pierce with the arrows of
226
Love that negative shell around it, to liberate
it and thus transmute evil into good.
There is no higher and greater work to
perform on this plane than the transmutation
of evil into good, and those who are able to
do it justly deserve to he called the Saviours
of the World. It is usually with their lives
that they pay the price for that transmutation,
for that service they render to Humanity.
But is there an effort too great, a
price too high, to pay for the liberation of
Humanity from the bonds of Evil? Human
hatred, jealousy, and all the other evil
passions, like a great wave, lifted Jesus to
the Cross. As a deadly arrow, they transfixed
the human body of Krishna. and caused
His mortal self to die. They persecuted
Buddha, and every other lesser teacher who
ever taught Humanity the Law of Love.
As in the days of old, so in modern times
the same fact repeats itself. It is the ageold
Evil which comes continually for liberation
from its own negative qualities. And
Love, gentle yet strong, presses to its heart
those thorny branches of Evil, and with its
warmth, its tenderness, makes them burst
forth into beautiful blossoms of Love.
THE LAW OF EVOLUTION: ALL VIBRA-
TIONS TEND TO RISE UPWARD IN THE
SCALE OF ETERNAL HARMONY.
The Law of Evolution, that saving ray of
227
the Great Law, expresses itself on the three
planes, the physical, the mental, and the
Spiritual. When on the Spiritual plane, it
appears as Eternal Unfoldment. When seen
through the physical or mental lens, its
evolutionary action is called Progress. The
wind which whirls the dust from the ground,
and carries it up into the air, is governed by
that Law. It proceeds in spirals, the spiral
being the form through which the Law
operates. The cyclone on dry land, the
typhoon on the sea, are governed by the
same Law. Whenever left to themselves to
operate normally, all vibrations tend naturally
to rise upward. It is only through conscious
or unconscious perversion that this
upward tendency can be reversed. Evil
itself is nothing but the reversed upward
movement of good. Positive vibrations,
whenever reversed in their ever ascending
and unfolding course, become negative, and
assume then all those characteristics which
are called "1. If it were not for the Law
of Evolution, the laws of Rhythm and Polarity
would have kept Humanity in their
clutches eternally. Yet no matter how much
those laws, especially the law of Rhythm,
try to throw us back to the point from which
we started, they do not succeed because of
that Law of Evolution. There is always a
little gain on the side of the Positive, due
to the continual operation of that eternal
Helpmate of ours. We call it hope, as it
always carries us beyond our own human
228
selves, remains with us, sustains and uplifts
us, when everything else seems to have
deserted us. It is like the last string of
that great Lyre called Human Life, which,
when the rest are broken, still strikes into
our hearts new courage to continue the
struggle and to win our fight. Being a Law,
and an eternal one, it is not only Hope that
the Law of Evolution brings to us, but also
the assurance. that no matter what may
happen, SUCCESS and TRIUMPH are ours
eventually.
229
LESSON FIVE
1. QUES. How many laws govern the
Universe in the Absolute?
ANS. One Universal, All-Inclusive Law
called the Great Law.
2. QUES. How many laws govern this
World in the present state of
human consciousness?
ANS. Seven Laws, of which three are
immutable, eternal, Laws of the
Absolute, and four are transitory,
mutable, laws of the Relative.
3. QUES. Why are there three Laws of theAbsolute?
ANS. Because of the Triune State of
the present human consciousness,
through which the One
Universal Great Law appears in
three aspects.
4. QUES. What are the three Laws of theAbsolute?
ANS. First: Life, Mind, Truth, Love,
Spirit, is All in All. Second: The
Same Law governs always everything,
everywhere, in the same
way, from the greatest star down
to the smallest electron. Third:
Everything is Vibration.
5. QUES. What does the first of the Lawsof the Absolute mean?
ANS. It means the All-ness of the
Great Principle.
6. QUES. What does the second of theLaws of the Absolute stand for?
230
ANS. It stands for the Universality of
the Great Law.
7. QUES. What does the third of the Lawsof the Absolute mean?
ANS. It means Infinite and Eternal
Activity.
8. QUES. What attitude has one to take inregard to those Laws of the
Absolute?
ANS. One has to attune, to harmonize,
oneself with them.
9. QUES. What practical result does thatbring?
ANS. An ever-increasing sense of freedom
and actual power.
10. QUES. What results are brought aboutby the transgression of those
laws?
ANS. Disharmony and loss of all
power.
11. QUES. Are those Laws of the Absoluteinferior to the Great Principle
Itself?
ANS. No, because they are an integral
part of the Great Principle, and
are the means by which It
governs the Universe.
12. QUES. What are the four laws of theRelative?
ANS. They are the laws of Polarity, of
Rhythm, of Gender, and of
Cause and Effect.
13. QUES. Why are they called transitorylaws?
231
ANS. Because they were brought into
existence by Mind ( Lucifer) himself,
and must therefore be also
destroyed by Mind.
14. QUES. How did they first come into
existence?
ANS. Mind (Lucifer) claiming to be a
power by himself, constituted a
seeming power aside from All
Power. Thus was the law of
Polarity brought into existence.
Out of the law of Polarity grew
all the other laws of the Relative.
15. QUES. What power have those lawsnowadays?
ANS. They rule Humanity with. a rod
of iron, and try to stop all
progress.
16. QUES. What attitude should one havetowards those laws?
ANS. One should learn how to master
them.
17. QUES. What will be the practical result
of mastering those laws?
ANS. Freedom, power, and dominion
over all.
18. QUES. By what means can that be
achieved?
ANS. By actually living the Laws of
the Absolute. Their power will
overcome all the limitations imposed
by the laws of the Relative.
19. QUES. How does the law of Polarityread?
232
ANS. "Everything in this World in the
present state of human consciousness
appears to have two poles,
the positive and negative poles."
20. QUES. What does the law of Polaritymean?
ANS. It means perpetual disharmony
due to the continual fight of the
two principles, the Positive and
the Negative.
21. QUES. How does one overcome it?
ANS. By always casting one's weight
in the scale of the Positive.
22. QUES. How can one enforce positivestatements?
ANS. By hacking them up with the
following words: "With the help
of God" or "With the help of the
Great Law."
23. QUES. Why are those words so powerful?
ANS. Because neither God nor His
Great Law have any opposites.
24. QUES. Has the Negative any powerover the Positive?
ANS. In reality it has not, because of
its non-existence, but in the
present state of human consciousness
it has to the extent that one
concedes that power to it.
25. QUES. Why has the Negative suchpower over human beings?
ANS. Because they believe in it and
utterly fear it.
26. QUES. How can that power be destroyed?
233
ANS. First, by discovering it; second,
by knowing that it is not danger-
ous;and finally, by realizing that
it has no existence or root in the
Absolute.
27. QUES. What statement did Krishna
make about the law of Polarity?
ANS. That God is above it.
28. QUES. What was the comment of Jesus
concerning it?
ANS. That the Law of God is the Only
Power.
29. QUES. Why is it difficult to keep a
secret?
ANS. Because of the law of Polarity.
30. QUES. Why is there an inevitable re-
action to each action?
ANS. Because of the law of Polarity.
31. QUES. What are the causes of indecision?
ANS. The law of Polarity.
32. QUES. How does the law of Rhythmread?
ANS. "Everything in this World in
the present state of human consciousness
inhales and exhales,
goes up and down by compensated
oscillations."
33. QUES. What is the operation of thelaw of Rhythm on the largest
known scale?
ANS. In the progress and retrogression
of Humanity.
34. QUES. How does it affect individualnations?
234
ANS. They rise and fall? to rise and fall
again, repeatedly, until they have
learned how to overcome that
law.
35. QUES. How does the law affect individ-
uals?
ANS. By bringing into their life periods
of success alternating with periods
of failure.
36. QUES. How can that law be overcome
in individual life?
ANS. By taking all possible advantages
of its ascending forward movement,
and by being determined
not to he carried away during its
backward and downward movement.
37. QUES. Should one keep to the matter
one has on hand, even through
the backward movement of the
law of Rhythm?
ANS. Yes, but one should carefully
avoid starting anything new during
that period, as it is bound to
be a failure.
38. QUES. What is the best general attitudeduring the backward movement
of the law of Rhythm?
ANS. Optimism, coupled with increased
activity.
39. QUES. What changes are brought aboutin one's life by mastering the
law of Rhythm?
235
ANS. Success without periodical failures.
40. QUES. Have those who have achievedsuccess in their life mastered the
law of Rhythm?
ANS. Yes.
41. QUES. Does the law of Rhythm manifest
itself also on the physical
plane?
ANS. Yes, throughout all Nature. Its
operation is especially noticeable
in a body of water during a storm.
42. QUES. What does the Biblical story ofthe dream of the Pharaoh, about
the seven cows, explained by
Joseph, refer to?
ANS. To the law of Rhythm.
43. QUES. What is the law of Gender?
ANS. An aspect of the law of Polarity.
44. QUES. How does it read?
ANS. "Everything in this World in
the present state of human consciousness
has two genders, the
male and female gender."
45. QUES. How does it operate?
ANS. Through the influence of one
gender upon the other.
46. QUES. What is the real purpose ofmarriage?
ANS. The building up of character by
mutual development of the complementary
characteristics.
47. QUES. According to the law of Gender,
what are human beings?
236
ANS. They are half-individuals, who
seek completion through marriage.
48. QUES. Do men and women already
possess, in a latent state, their
complementary qualities?
ANS. Yes. Each man possesses latent
female qualities, and each woman
latent male qualities.
49. QUES. What happens to two individualswho have worked out their mutual
completion?
ANS. They become independent,
strong, and more loving, because
of their inner completion.
50. QUES. Which is the easiest way to workout that completion?
ANS. Through marriage based on
mutual love.
51. QUES. If the love is on one side only,
can the problem of completion
be worked out?
ANS. Yes, but with much greater
difficulty.
52. QUES. What chance for completion have
those who married only for worldly
considerations?
ANS. None whatsoever. Therefore the
sooner they part, the better it is
for them.
53. QUES. Is completion worked out in
some other way?
ANS. Yes. In general, through association
with other individuals, be it
men or women.
237
54. QUES. Does it also affect children?
ANS. Yes. That is why co-education is
desirable.
55. QUES. How does the law of Genderexpress itself through the human
Mind?
ANS. Through the Self-consciousness,
the male, and the Sub-conscious-
ness, the female of the human
Mind.
56. QUES. Does every individual, be it man
or woman, have the two genders
in their respective minds?
ANS. Yes.
57. QUES. What is the law of "Cause andEffect" and how does it read?
ANS. "Every effect has its cause and
every cause has its effect."
58. QUES. Has the law of Cause and Effectany connection with the Laws of
the Absolute?
ANS. Yes. It has its roots in the
Absolute, but, Cause and Effect
being instantaneous and simultaneous
there, its operation is
entirely different from its mode
of expression as a transitory law.
59. QUES. Why does it express itself differ-
ently as a transitory law?
ANS. Because of our present limited
concept of Time and Space.
60. QUES. How does that law affect human
beings?
ANS. It shapes their destiny.
238
61. QUES. Can man himself change his
destiny?
ANS. Yes, by continually starting positive
causes, which will culminate
in positive effects.
62. QUES. Has one control over the Pastand the Future?
ANS. None over the Past, all over the
Future.
63. QUES. Of what use is the Past?
ANS. It stands as a lesson to us for
the Present.
61. QUES. Which is the most important
time on which to center all one's
thoughts and energies?
ANS. The ever-present NOW.
65. QUES. Why is that NOW so important?
ANS. Because it stands for the
Absolute, Which includes in Itself
the Past, Present, and Future.
66. QUES. What actions does one continuallyperform in the ever-present NOW?
ANS. One reaps the Past, and sows the
Future.
67. QUES. Can the effect of a cause once
started be avoided?
ANS. No. The law itself prevents it.
68. QUES. What is the operation of thelaw of Cause and Effect in what
is called reincarnation?
ANS. In their successive reincarnations
human beings reap the effects
of causes they started in previous
ones.
239
69. QUES. Does that explain why some
human beings are born with all
kinds of limitations, and others
with all advantages, some to
suffer, others to enjoy?
ANS. Yes. It is all due to the operation
of the law of Cause and Effect,
which follows human beings
through their successive lives,
and exacts from them the last
farthing.
70. QUES. Can prayer modify the operation
of that law?
ANS. No. There is no pleading with
the law. But prayer can give
one strength to start positive
causes in spite of negative effects,
and thus change the Future.
71. QUES. How did Jesus formulate that
law?
ANS. "With what measure ye mete, it
shall be measured to you again."
72. QUES. What are the practical advan-
tages of the knowledge of that
law?
ANS. It does away with worries by
enabling one to control one's
Future in starting positive causes,
which because of that law are
bound to culminate in corresponding
positive effects.
73. QUES. Is the cycle of the Seven Lawsclosed by that law of Cause and
Effect?
240
ANS. Yes.
74. QUES. What is the Law of Love andthe Law of Evolution?
ANS. Two divine rays of the Great
Law sent down to Earth to help
humanity.
75. QUES. How does the Law of Love read?
ANS. "No matter under what circumstances,
always meet everything
and everybody with Love.''
76. QUES. What is the practical advantageof that Law?
ANS. It destroys the Negative and
strengthens the Positive as well
within as without the individual
who uses it.
77. QUES. Can it overcome all Negative?
ANS. Yes, because Love is that Infinite,
Universal Power which has
no equal. Love is both the Law
and the fulfillment of the Law.
78. QUES. Why does the Negative still come
to those who have risen to the
highest in the Positive?
ANS. Because in those instances it
seeks transmutation, release from
its own negative condition, which
can be achieved only through the
Law of Love.
79. QUES. What is the Law of Evolution?
ANS. It is the last string of the great
Lyre of human life, and is also
called Hope.
80. QUES. How does it read?
241
ANS. "All vibrations tend to rise
upward in the scale of Eternal
Harmony.
81. QUES. What is its practical value inhuman life?
ANS. It always lifts those who are
fallen, and gives hope to those
who are discouraged. Being a
ray of the Great Law, it continually
opposes itself to the
operation of the law of Polarity
and Rhythm, and thus counteracts,
in a certain measure their
negative effects.
82. QUES. What is Evil?
ANS. Evil is but the negation of the
Law of Evolution. It is the
reversed, backward movement of
positive vibrations.
242
243
244
N this present stage of
Evolution it becomes vitally
important for Humanity to
have a thorough knowledge
of the Mind, and of the laws
that govern it. Evil---that is, the conscious
or unconscious violation of the Laws
of the Absolute, due to the reversal of the
natural ascending movement of all vibra-
tions-----originated in Mind. Mind, from its
mental plane, is sending its perverted
vibrations into the physical, or magnetic,
plane. It is Mind which, when misused,
debases Life, and it is the problem of
Mind to regenerate Life, through the
proper use of Knowledge. It is on the plane
245
of Mind that all mistakes must be corrected,
that all evil must be transmuted into good,
because it is on this plane that the first
negative vibrations started, and therefore
must also die away. Mind has a higher rate
of vibration, and hence greater power, in
a way, than Life. Being aware of its own
existence, it can consciously concentrate
and direct its own powers wherever it wishes.
When Self-Consciousness enters the ordinary
Magnetic Vibrations it raises them to a
certain height and changes the whole of
their nature, making them conscious of
their own existence. At that point they
cease to be called Life Energy, and are
operating under the name of Mind Force.
In other words, the first manifestation of
Self-conscious Magnetic Vibrations is called
Mental Vibrations, whose various combinations
constitute thoughts. As for the Magnetic
Force within the body, the solar plexus
is acting as a distributing agent for it. With
the Mind Force, it is the brain which performs
this office. Ideas are formed in Mind,
which, working through the brain, translates
those ideas into thoughts, and conveys
them to a certain gland located at about the
center of the forehead, whence they are
projected into Space as Mental Vibrations.
This gland is called the Pituitary Body, or
Telepathic Apparatus, and its function is
to send out and receive simultaneously
Mental Vibrations. The Ancients, especially
the Hindus, knew this function of the Pitui246
tary Body, which they called the Bump of
Wisdom, or the Eye of Siva Mind, Lucifer).
Very often their divinities and saints were
represented in painting and sculpture with
that Bump of Wisdom, a glowing precious
stone sometimes marking its place. The
Pituitary body, or Telepathic Apparatus,
is a most wonderfully constructed sending
and receiving station for Mental Vibrations.
It is infinitely delicate and sensitive, so that
it can perceive the slightest vibrations, at
the greatest distance, and at the same time
it is strong enough to send out vibrations of a
power which has no equal on this material
plane. The wireless stations which send
their messages throughout the world operate
on the same principle .as the Pituitary Body.
Only this Telepathic Apparatus, when
developed, is incomparably more effective
than the best wireless station. The ordinary
Mental Vibrations proceed from the Telepathic
Apparatus in so-called spheric waves
-that is, like 'rays of light dartting from a
central point, and forming around that
point an ever increasing sphere whose
boundaries are restricted only by the magnetic
attraction of the Earth, thus creating a
kind of mental atmosphere surrounding this
globe, So it is with all vibrations, because
they are all governed in the same way by
the Great Law. That peculiarity of vibrations
in general explains why the ordinary
thought is perceptible only at a short distance,
Every thought vibration starting
247
from the Telepathic Apparatus is sent in
innumerable mental rays, in all directions
from it. Each mental message has its
particular vibratory rate which, when it
impinges upon the Telepathic Apparatus
of another individual, is immediately translated
into the original thought just as the
dots and dashes of the Morse Code are
translated into the words of the message by
the wireless operator. A certain amount of
energy is used for every individual thought.
That energy is embodied in each mental ray
of a thought, and manifests itself also as
the attraction which holds those rays together,
thus forming the above mentioned mental
sphere. When starting from the Telepathic
Apparatus, that sphere of Mental Vibrations
is small, but its size increases almost
instantaneously, because of the forward
movement of the Primal Energy embodied
in its component rays. Though the amount
of original energy in each thought is not
increased, yet the size of each mental
vibratory sphere grows to almost unlimited
proportions, and the same amount of
energy has to cover this ever increasing
area, thus weakening the Mental Vibrations
to such an extent that they become
almost imperceptible. This is why, when
near to a center of such ordinary mental
activity, one can easily perceive it-a
perception which is completely lost at a
certain distance, for the reasons stated
above. The mental atmosphere surround248
ing this Earth is made of infinite varieties
of these ordinary Mental Vibrations, which
are called "THOUGHT DUST." They are
imperceptible, because they are so diluted.
Yet even that "thought dust" becomes a
valuable substance when placed in contact
with the concentrated thought. It is then
the very element which makes that second
kind of thought grow and increase in power
during its projection through Space. In
order to make a thought strong, and enable
it to reach, as rays of light sent from a
projector, any individual, no matter how far
removed he may be, the spheric vibrations
of the ordinary thought must be concentrated
into a single ray, made one-pointed,
thus sending all their power in one direction
instead of letting it radiate in all directions.
The way to proceed is as follows: First
make the mental contact with Universal
Life Energy, as indicated in Lesson II.
When the Life Force is felt to flow, take a
simple thought, a concrete object being
preferable to an abstract one, at least for
beginners. For instance, take a flower, a
carnation. Then with a conscious, sustained
effort of will power, concentrate the mind
on that thought of the carnation. Those who
do not know much about the mastery of
Mind will find it rather difficult at first to
do this. All kinds of extraneous thoughts
will all the time flash through their minds
and thus divert their attention from the
original thought of the carnation. One has
249
to watch that mind continually, and by the
constant exercise of will power bring it
back to the thought on which it is to be
concentrated. By and by the mind, so
restless and difficult to curb in the beginning,
will become more docile and obedient. Concentration
is a science in itself, and can be
attained only through patience, perseverance,
and the continual exercise of will
power. When the mind has been so trained
that it can remain concentrated for any
length of time on a certain object, be it
concrete or abstract, then the work of concentration
has been properly carried out.
The mental image of the carnation, mentioned
above, must become so real, so tangible,
that one should be able to see it, to
feel it, to smell it, mentally, just as if it
were an actual flower. When that is achieved,
the next step is to be taken. Still holding
before the mental eye the concentrated
thought of the carnation, inhale deeply,
thus lifting the diaphragm and expanding
the solar plexus. Having reached the climax
of inhalation, think for one instant about
the person to whom that concentrated
thought is to be sent. That quick thought is
nothing but an ordinary thought which does
not interfere with the concentrated one, and
which can be sent out from the Telepathic
Apparatus without diverting the mind from
the concentrated thought. The ordinary
thought, through its spheric expansion, will
instantaneously reach the limits of this
250
Earth, and will somewhere contact the
person to whom the concentrated thought of
the carnation is to he sent. That contact,
once established, connects that person with
the operator by an invisible mental line.
After that, exhale, and in that moment let
the concentrated thought of the carnation
go. The exhalation contracts the solar
plexus, which then sends through the spinal
nerve and brain to the Pituitary Body the
Life Force which is needed to vitalize and
propel the concentrated thought. In a
moment of strong desires or passion the
whole process, including concentration, is
done automatically, which accounts for the
heavy breathing during such times. That
is why thoughts sent in those moments
carry with them such constructive or destructive
powers. The one-pointed thought,
filled with Life Energy, will dart like lightning
from the Pituitary Body into Space,
and because of the physical law which says
"all elements choose the path of least
resistance," it will follow the invisible
mental line already established between the
two parties by the ordinary thought. The
concentrated, one-pointed thought will reach
the person, no matter how far away he may
be, and will strike his Telepathic Apparatus.
If the individual is not concentrating his
mind upon some other thought at that time,
he will become conscious of the thought of
the carnation. The law of Gender, explained
in the fifth lesson, is continually operating
251
also in the human mind. According to that
law all human beings, both men and women,
have each of them their minds manifesting
the two genders, the male and the female.
The Self-consciousness belongs to the male
gender, and the Sub-consciousness to the
female gender. All thought emanating from
the Self-consciousness therefore belongs to
the male gender. The one-pointed thought
proceeding from the Telepathic Apparatus
of an individual is naturally attracted to,
and strikes, the corresponding Apparatus in
another individual, which acts like a wireless
receiving station. This is the first action of
the one-pointed thought. After the concentrated
thought of the carnation has
reached the other person's Telepathic
Apparatus, and produced there its impression,
exactly as in the receiving station of
the wireless, it does not stay there. It
penetrates into the Sub-consciousness, the
female mental self of the individual, and
there it acts like a seed planted in the
ground. It is important to note, in regard
to the reception of the mental message by
the Telepathic Apparatus, that all thoughts
are usually recorded exactly as they are
received, without any increase or decrease,
just as in the case of wireless messages. But
when the concentrated thought of the
carnation has penetrated into the other
individual's Sub-consciousness, it begins to
grow there like an ordinary seed thrown into
the soil. The more Life Energy there was
252
conveyed into the one-pointed thought
during the exhalation and contraction of the
solar plexus, the more vital that seed will
become, and the stronger the growth of the
mental plant springing from that seed will
be. There the law of Gender has its full
sway. The Sub-consciousness, the female
of the mental Self, exercises the function of
its gender, increasing and multiplying by
many times the seed thrown into it. It is
almost incredible how much the Subconsciousness
can develop and increase a
strong thought seed thrown into it. In its
turn, the thought seed acts like an ordinary
seed. It puts forth a sprout, and sends down
a root. The root penetrates deeper and
deeper into the soil of the Sub-consciousness,
and the sprout grows up through it into the
Self-consciousness of the individual, who at
that moment becomes aware of that thought
planted in his Sub-consciousness. Then the
individual again begins to entertain the
same thought, but in a different way. It is
no longer a casual thought, forgotten in a
moment, Continual thinking of it takes the
place of casual thought, as from the Subconsciousness
similar thoughts are all the
time being sent into the Self-consciousness
of the individual. The Sub-consciousness is
yielding the harvest which the Self-conscious-
ness reaps. In the aforesaid instance of the
concentrated thought of the carnation,
that thought seed, thrown into the field of
the Sub-consciousness of the person to
253
whom that thought was sent, will grow
there and develop in the manner just
explained. Then that individual will become
conscious of that thought of the carnation in
a most unusual way. He will no longer
think of one carnation, but of a whole field
of them, and of every kind. For some time
his whole mind will be occupied by carnations,
and the richer the harvest, the longer
he will think of them. That female quality
of the Sub-consciousness explains the necessity
of guarding against the intrusion into
it of undesirable thoughts. The Self-con-
sciousness can, with comparative ease,
destroy any undesirable thoughts merely
by denying them, so long as they have not
yet penetrated into the Sub-consciousness.
But once penetrated there, they become too
deeply rooted to be easily removed. That
is why one must be an alert sentinel at this
mental door. Chronic troubles of any kind
are usually due to that very reason; and
until the disharmonious mental growth is
extracted with all its roots, no permanent
cure can be obtained. From what has been
said above, it is evident that the more Life
Energy there is embodied in the thought,
the stronger the results will be. That
explains why some individuals, devoid of
any oratorical talent or harmony of speech,
are nevertheless able to produce a deep
impression on their audiences, while on the
other hand some individuals seemingly
endowed with all qualities to captivate their
254
listeners, even if they please their audiences
for the time being do not impress them
lastingly. Lack of vitality is the cause of it.
They have not sufficient life energy within
themselves, or don't know how to contact it
outside themselves, in order to produce on
the public an abiding impression. As a
general rule, simple, short thoughts give
better results than long, complicated ones,
because of that peculiarity of the Sub-con-
sciousness, of breaking up into their cornponent
parts all such compound thoughts.
A complex thought being thus divided, its
strength is proportionally lessened. The
Sub-consciousness, being below the Selfconscious
status, rears and develops without
discrimination any kind of thought, the
negative as well as the positive. It is the
field in which wheat and tares are growing
together, until the day of harvest, when the
Self-consciousness makes a selection and
throws away the tares, keeping the wheat.
In that scientific mental work, every action
is based upon and governed by a mental
law. Therefore there is no need to worry or
doubt that proper results will be obtained,
as long as the mental law is rightly applied.
It is just as exact in its results as is the solution
of a mathematical problem according to
the laws of mathematics. That second
operation of the same thought is a very
important one in Mental Science, because of
the extraordinary results obtained through
255
Last comes the third operation of the
same thought. Of all three, it is the least
known, and at first sight, seems the least
important. Yet it is of the greatest importance,
especially to the operator, because it
concerns him directly and most vitally.
After the thought has accomplished its procreative
function in the Sub-consciousness,
it does not remain there. It proceeds further,
and again like a ray it darts into Space.
There that concentrated. one-pointed
thought, full of Life Energy, proceeds at an
incredible speed through Space, and goes
as far as the Earth magnetic attraction
permits it. The more Life Force there was
embodied in that thought, the further it
will go, and the stronger power of attraction
it will develop. Because of that inherent
quality of attraction, that living, concentrated
mental ray, flashing through Space
which is filled with "thought dust," attracts
to it loose particles of the ordinary spheric
thought vibrations, the product of thinking
Humanity. Thought particles of the same
rate of vibration, if the same kind and
character, are attracted to that mental
magnet which is the one-pointed thought.
And that thought, rushing through Space,
thus grows continually bigger and stronger.
When the propulsive power embodied in the
thought at the moment of its start from the
Telepathic Apparatus has finally been
neutralized by the Earth attraction, the
one-pointed thought-ray is then compelled
256
by that physical law to turn back, and
return to its starting point. Like an ordinary
projectile, it describes its course in an ellipse.
It acts like a boomerang, that peculiarly
shaped weapon made of light wood curved
in a certain way, which the Australian
natives use especially to hunt birds. Thrown
into the air, after it has reached its mark the
boomerang returns to the thrower. The
one-pointed thought is indeed a boomerang.
It finally always returns to the one who sent
it. And on its backward course the concentrated
thought, passing always through
the "thought dust" of this planet, still
grows and grows, so that when it finally
comes back to the one that first sent it, it is
usually not recognized, because it has become
so big. It is indeed difficult to recognize,
in the strong, lusty, thought-fellow, the
original thought-child which was sent into
the World. And because of that change,
very often it is refused admission by its own
parent. No thought, no feeling, no action,
good or evil, is ever lost. Soon or late it
will come back. It is unavoidable, because
it is a law, which is often called the law of
Retribution. It is considered a moral law,
the operation of Divine Justice, yet in
reality it is nothing but a physical law,
which no man living in a physical body can
ever avoid, because it is a law of Nature.
When human beings will know that to be a
mw with which no avoidance, pleading, or
compromise is possible, they will, out of self257
protection, cease to send unkind thoughts or
feelings, or perform evil actions, because
they will know that soon or late they will
have to encounter the consequences. And
the shock will be great, because concentrated
thoughts always come back vastly increased.
This mental law explains that statement of
Jesus which created so much discussion
among all Christian theologians, and which
was never settled by them in a satisfactory
way. Jesus said, "WITH WHAT MEASURE
YE METE, IT SHALL.BE MEASURED TO
YOIJ AGAIN," and He added also, "THAT
THE MEASURE WOULD BE FULL, PRESSED
DOWN AND RUNNING OVER."
Almost everyone has bad the experience
in life that kind thoughts or good actions
which they continually bestowed upon some
individuals, were not at all appreciated,
and seemed to be entirely wasted. Ingratitude
was often the only return for such
kindness, which naturally caused great
disappointment. On the other hand, for no
apparent reason, complete strangers with
whom one was later thrown in contact began
to show unexpected kindness in thought and
deed. Naturally, an unconscious comparison
between the two cases arises in one's mind,
and the question presents itself of why
those to whom good was done did not
respond, while others to whom nothing was
given became channels for good to be
expressed. And because that good came
from strangers, it made one feel almost
258
uncomfortable, so that one was even tempted
to refuse it. That must never be done, however,
because it means to refuse admission
to one's own thoughts or actions. Those
kind thoughts or deeds which were considered
lost are thus coming back to their author,
and vastly increased, for the reasons
explained above. Good thoughts are to be
received with joy, and evil thoughts with
love, so as to transmute their nature from
negative to positive. No matter how much
one may try to prevent those thoughts from
coming back, they will continually return
until they gain admission.
The concentrated thought, when filled
with Life Energy, possesses a tremendous
creative power. As the law of Attraction is
continually operating through it, it gradually
attracts all the elements necessary to bring
that thought into actual manifestation on
this material plane. Thus all human desires
can be scientifically realized in one's life, if
they are not contrary to the Universal Laws.
The following method can be used to secure
the desired success. After the mental contact
with the Universal Life Energy is made,
concentrate the thought, as explained previously,
on the desired object. Make it so
real, mentally, that it will seem to be an
actual fact. Repeat this as often as possible,
and at the same time use constant effort to
come into material contact with the desired
object, which will then finally grow into
one's life. Life Energy, with its unlimited
259
power of Attraction, will attract to the
mental concept of the concentrated thought
the material elements for its expression.
Never doubt, or fear that it will not be so,
because fear or doubt will prevent the
realization of one's desires. Remember that,
in conjunction with the mental law, is
continually operating the Law of Attraction.
All one needs to do is to perform one's part
properly, and leave the rest to the law of
Cause and Effect, the continual operation
of which will bring about the desired results.
Thus worry, that great enemy of all unfoldment,
will also be destroyed. As an artist,
before painting a picture, must have it
already created in his mind, so it is in life.
First must be created, by the concentrated
thought, the mental image of the thing one
desires. Repeatedly dwelling on it increases
its powers in every direction, and condenses
them until, like invisible vapors which,
when condensed, appear suddenly as a
visible drop, they burst forth in a material
realization. The more Life Force there is
used in the concentrated thought, the
stronger are those powers manifested in it.
By continual contact, through the mental
method, with Universal Life Energy, that
power is developed to an ever increasing
degree. Thus every human being can by
and by have all his desires realized, if he will
persevere long enough in constructive work
in that direction on the two planes, the mental
and the physical. With Mental Vibra260
tions, as with everything else, perseverance
is one of the important factors of Success.
Therefore the cardinal point to be remembered
is that in order to obtain Success,
mental activities must be combined with
actual driving and working in the same
direction also on the material plane.
The reason why our creative thoughts
and desires are not immediately realized is
because of our present material state of
consciousness, which must translate everything
into its own terms to make it tangible.
In other words, physical effort and work are
necessary to materialize it in one's life.
When our state of consciousness will have
risen to the plane of Mind, every thought will
be a creation by itself, and just as real and
tangible to those living on that plane as are
material things to us now. Then the whole
World will be a mental World, in which
Humanity will live unrestricted by the
physical, material limitations which now
bind them. Yet even that is not a perfect
condition, as the human mind is still full of
its own limitations. It is Lucifer, who is still
an exile from Heaven, and who therefore
cannot grasp such concepts as Infinity and
Eternity. Only when Love, the Christ element
in each human being, will have purified
the human mind, and restored Lucifer, the
fallen one, to his original status of eternal
perfection, will Mind break all its limitations,
and be reunited with the Infinite and
Eternal. That last step will be called the
261
Spiritual State of Consciousness. And when
Humanity will have reached it, they will
realize that the realm of Spirit is all there
Is.
The power of concentrated thought has a
special application in healing all kinds of
troubles, physical, mental, and emotional.
These, in the form commonly called diseases,
are like parasites preying on their victim.
They clog the normal functions of the body,
which becomes sluggish or temporarily
abortive, although their fundamental natures
remain the same. Such mental parasites
appear to be negative through and through,
yet that is not the case. Even mental germs
of diseases, or evil thoughts, could have no
actual power if it were not for the Life
Energy which animates them. In those
instances perfect Life Energy is clothed with
negative thought films, which hold it
imprisoned. It is like a soap bubble which,
although it may appear to be a homogeneous
mass throughout, is nothing but a tiny film
separating the air within from the. air without.
A slight touch breaks the film, and
the soap bubble is no more. So it is with diseases
and all other kinds of negative thoughts
growing in the field of the Sub-consciousness.
They are but bubbles of evil, and are
destroyed by the strong contact of a concentrated,
positive thought. The bubble
of evil then bursts, and Life Energy, pure
and perfect, is liberated from it, to become
one with the concentrated thought, thus
262
increasing that thought's healing power.
The negative is destroyed in that way, by
the proper use of mental laws.
Whenever a case of a negative condition
is handled, the first thing to do is to make
the mental contact with Universal Life
Energy, and let the magnetic current flow
into the body of the patient until the point
of saturation is reached. The next step is to
deny silently the fear of the trouble which is
besetting the patient. Negation of anything
on the mental plane means death to the thing
which is denied. As the fear of any kind of
trouble is the power by which that trouble
has hold of an individual, it is therefore
essential first to deny and thus destroy that
fear. That fear once destroyed, the elimination
of the trouble itself is a comparatively
easy task. There is another reason why it is
preferable to deny the fear of a trouble rather
than to deny the trouble itself. A silent
denial of the negative condition itself is
usually not very favorably accepted by the
patient's mind. To deny a violent headache,
which appears so real to the one who
has it, will result only in stirring up a silent
mental protest in the mind of the patient.
"My head is splitting, and you try to assure
me that there is no headache," is the retort
of the mind to such a denial. On the other
hand, the denial of the fear of the same
negative condition will produce opposite
results in the mind of the patient, which will
say, "It is true that my head aches terribly,
263
but I do not fear it; I am brave enough to
face it, and to try to overcome it." Such a
method of procedure always works better,
because of the peculiar psychology of the
mind of the individual. Everyone likes to be
called brave, and even the human mind is not
an exception to that general rule. Mental
denials should never be made in an aggressive
tone, for two reasons. First, it would
antagonize the patient's mental self; secondly,
it would show that the operator himself is
making a reality out of that trouble which
he tries to remove. Those who are conscious
of their own power are always calm
and dignified, and never aggressive, because
aggressiveness is due to latent fear, and is
therefore weakness, not strength. Neither
must the denial be too often repeated, as
otherwise it may produce just the opposite
result from the desired one. By too many
repetitions of the denial, unfortunately the
trouble itself, which one is supposed to
destroy, is being emphasized, because the
patient's mind is continually dwelling on it,
with the result that the trouble one wishes to
overcome has been greatly increased in the
patient's mind. A strong, calm, dignified,
denial produces the best results. The only
consideration Jesus ever showed to evil was
to say, "Get thee behind me, Satan!" He
knew the law, and scientifically applied it
all the time, because He was the greatest
scientist the world has ever known. After
the denial of the fear of the trouble, the
264
operator must realize within his own mind
the opposite Positive Reality. There, all
the science and knowledge derived from the
previous lessons must be properly utilized.
The basic, eternal Truth to be realized is
that man is the eternal and perfect manifestation
of the Absolute, and is in direct and
constant relation with It. That realization
of Eternal Harmony is often called the
"DECLARATION OF TRUTH" It is indeed
a declaration of Truth, the stating of
those Eternal Verities. It is just the
opposite of what are commonly called suggestions.
There the operator, by the use
of the mental laws, merely suggests to the
patient a certain thought. That thought
may or may not be true, yet the Selfconsciousness
may accept it because of
ignorance, and the Sub-consciousness develop
it, being without the power of discrimination
between good and evil. Such a method
is reprehensible, because it is not based on a
Universal Law, but on personal will power.
The statements of the Positive Reality are
like harmonious notes, which are caught by
the mental strings of the patient in responsive
vibrations to the original sound, because
each individual possesses within himself
those latent strings of perfection, WHICH
ARE HIS OWN BY BIRTHRIGHT, being a
part of his eternal nature. It is the awakening
of an individual to his own eternal,
perfect status, and the more the individual
becomes conscious of it, the greater is the
265
victory on the side of the positive. The
thoughts of health and harmony sent by
the operator to his patient are both healing
vibrations and seeds of health. The operator
must never make a reality out of the
trouble he wishes to overcome in his patient.
Though performing all that mental work
within his own mind according to the rules
stated in the beginning of this lesson, he
does it only for the patient. The operator's
own knowledge of the unreality of all
negative must be so strong that he does not
need to deny for himself even the fear of its
existence. All the operator needs to do is to
change the patient's way of thinking, by
destroying those negative bubbles of evil
in all its manifold aspects. Once the field
of the Sub-consciousness of the patient is
weeded of all mental tares, the wheat-that
is, the normal, positive, thoughts-will
grow and manifest itself in the activities of
the person. Then the patient is healed.
In severe chronic cases, after several
successful mental treatments, the individual
often has a sudden relapse. Negative physical
and mental developments may become so
pronounced that the patient feels he cannot
stand it any longer. He feels as if all the
powers of evil were loosed upon him,
depriving him even of the hope of a possible
recovery. It is a condition so painful that
many cannot bear it, and request the
operator to stop the treatment, as they seem
to be growing worse all the time. Yet it is a
266
good sign, after all. It is called "MENTAL
CHEMICALIZATION," or the uprooting of
the negative thoughts from the Sub-con-
sciousness of the individual. When a plant
of the negative feels its last hour has come,
it clings with all its power, through its roots,
to the soil of the Sub-consciousness. Naturally
then, the process of eradication from
the Sub-consciousness is, like every extraction,
a very painful operation, the more so
because it is mental instead of physical.
In such a case the operator must explain to
the patient the causes of that reaction? and
show him thc advantage of carrying that
operation to the very end. In some cases
the negative in the patient seems to be so
strong that it is felt, even by the operator
himself, as a great pressure which he is
unable to lift. In such a case the mental
treatment must be stopped for a while and
the whole work left exclusively to the
Magnetic Force. After a little while the
Life Energy of the Universe, flowing through
the operator to the patient, will, with its
wonderful basic qualities of harmony, restore
harmony within the operator, who will then
be able to resume the mental work.
As with the magnetic treatments, so also
with the mental ones. It is impossible to tell
how long a patient should be treated. Each
case must be handled individually, and as
there are no two cases alike, it is left to each
individual's intuitive powers to know when
to stop. A fairly good indication that the
267
treatment is successfully completed is a
certain sense of relief and harmony which
then pervades the operator. Mental treatments
may last from five minutes to several
hours, in some exceptionally acute cases.
Whenever possible they ought to be combined
with magnetic treatments, because in
that way the negative conditions are simultaneously
attacked and destroyed in both
the body and the mind of the patient, thus
bringing better and quicker results.
No mental treatment of any kind should
be given to people without their knowledge
and their special consent. The following
exceptions may be considered: First, in
treating insane people, whose minds are
not capable of determining whether they wish
to be treated or not. Second, in cases where
people, through accident or for any other
reason, were rendered unconscious. Third,
intoxicated persons whose powers of discrimination
are temporarily in abeyance.
When handling such cases, the operator
must be very careful to protect himself from
mental transmission of the physical condition
of the patient, as otherwise the patient will
be disintoxicated at the expense of the
operator, who will in his turn become
intoxicated. The fourth instance of mental
treatment without the consent of the individual
is in the case of small children, who are
not yet sufficiently developed in their conscious
status to make their own choice. In
such cases the consent of the parents,
268
especially of the mother, is absolutely
necessary. Without that consent no successful
treatment could be given to a child,
because the mother thought acts upon a
child as a protecting cloak. Therefore not
only the consent of the mother is required,
but she must be included in the treatment
in order to reach her child properly.
As a general rule, it is advisable always to
protect oneself mentally, when treating,
from the possible transfer of the negative
condition of the patient to the operator.
Also when in a crowd, or among people
whose thoughts are not harmonious, that
self protection is necessary. It is achieved
by mentally denying the possibility of transfer
of such condition from one individual to
another. It is like surrounding one's self
with a mental wall which, if properly built,
is strong enough to repel any such negative
intrusions. Yet when building that mental
wall of self protection, one must be very
careful not to entertain any fear or doubt
of its efficacy. One must remember that
ONE IS A LAW TO ONE'S SELF ON THE
PLANE OF MIND, and doubts and fears
are cracks in that mental wall of self protection,
through which that from which it is
desired to be protected can penetrate.
Though the wall of mental protection is a
good bulwark against the ordinary mental
intruder, it is not sufficient when dealing
with so-called mental malpractices-that is,
the use of mental forces by some individual
269
for evil ends. There the only complete self
protection is vibrations of Love. These
being all powerful, perfect in every way,
pervading the three planes, the physical,
the mental, and the Spiritual, they form
around one a sphere of Love which, like a
diamond armor, repels and destroys every
negative vibration launched against it.
That important point must always be
remembered, THAT LOVE IS THE ONLY
SAFE PROTECTION WE HAVE.
Whenever Mental Vibrations are used
on one’s own self, be it for healing,
mental self-development, or any other
purpose, the same process is employed as
described in the beginning of this lesson,
with the sole difference that the concentrated
thought must be, so to say, inhaled
together with the air when the diaphragm is
lifted and the solar plexus expanded. Thus
the concentrated thought will be thrown by
the Self-consciousness of the operator directly
into his own Sub-consciousness, where the
process of multiplication and development
is the same as when that concentrated
thought is thrown into the Sub-consciousness
of another individual. Needless to say, the
ordinary thought necessary to establish a
connection between two parties is not to be
used here. It is exactly the process used
when one is trying to learn something by
heart. To memorize properly means to
plant one's own thought seeds in the
ground of one's own Sub-consciousness,
270
where they will in due time yield a harvest.
To remember is nothing but the ability to
contact at will one's own Sub-consciousness,
where all impressions are stored. When
treating oneself mentally, it is always
advisable to start with the magnetic treatment,
because of the extraordinary harmonizing
effect of the Magnetic Vibrations.
When treating patients at a distance, the
ordinary Mental Vibrations do not imply by
themselves a magnetic treatment. In order
to combine the two, the following method is
to be used. Concentrate the mind on the
patient in such a way as to think of him as
present. Make the mental image of the
patient so real and tangible that he appears
to be actually present, in the physical body.
The mental image of the patient thus created
will be the reflection of his physical self,
and each mental cell of that reflection of his
body will be connected by invisible Mental
Vibrations with the corresponding cell of
the physical body of the patient. As there
are about fifty billion cells in the human
body, each of which vibrates independently
of the others, the mental image of the
patient will therefore have at least fifty
billion mental lines through which will flow
the magnetic current directed to that mental
image by the operator. In order to increase
the flow of the magnetic current to the
mental image created by the operator, it is
advisable not only to direct one's hands, as
indicated in the magnetic treatment, toward
271
the mental image, but also to use (especially
for beginners) either a chair or some other
convenient material object, which must be
imagined to be the body of the patient, and
on which the hands of the operator may rest.
The magnetic current sent into' that material
object will, because of the mental image of
the patient intimately connected with the
object, be transmitted from it to the patient
in the manner previously stated. During
such absent treatments, another feature can
be taken advantage of, which it is not advisable
to employ in present treatments.
Audible treatment can be applied. The
sound vibrations of the spoken words will
also strike the mental image of the patient,
himself from there will be conveyed, together
with the magnetic current, to the patient
himself, thus increasing the power of the
Magnetic Vibrations. When properly executed,
such combined absent treatments
secure most powerful results. In fact, they
are much stronger than the ordinary treatments,
with the patient actually present,
because the patient's negative condition
produces no impression on the operator, and
therefore has no effect on him, on account of
the distance which separates the two.
Usually the patient, on the other end of the
mental line, feels the presence of the
operator, as vividly, as tangibly and closely,
as if he were actually there, in his physical
body. In some instances the patient may
even see the operator and talk with him,
272
and be convinced that the operator really
came to him, although the operator may be,
at that time, a thousand miles away. That
peculiar mental and magnetic phenomenon,
based on the law of Vibration, explains how
sometimes the same individual is seen by
people at the same time in several different
places. For some reason, those people were
thinking very strongly about the one who
appeared to them in what is called his
"astral body." Through one of his rays
they perceived the whole individual, as
through a ray of the sun we can see the sun
itself. And as each individual radiates
innumerable rays, many people can therefore
simultaneously perceive that individual
across Space in various places. All that is
necessary is that they shall be ''en rapport"
with him--in other words, they should be
magnetically and mentally attuned.
There is another form of mental force
which is much used nowadays, and which is
called hypnotism and suggestion. Suggestion
includes also auto-suggestion. Those
methods are all fundamentally immoral,
and therefore reprehensible. They violate
one of the basic rights and privileges of every
human being, the right of self-de termination.
They are based exclusively on Will Power,
and their method consists in using that Will
Power in connection with thoughts in order
to subjugate the other individual's will
power. If abused, they utterly destroy the
character of the subject, and even when used
273
with moderation, they still always neutralize
his individuality. Even auto-suggestion
works destructively, in the respect that
by continual repetition of the same thought,
the mind of the individual becomes numbed,
mentally frozen, almost lifeless, acting like
an automaton. This shows how unscientific
such methods are since they can produce
such negative results. Hypnotism, suggestion
and auto-suggestion, instead of building
up the character destroy it, and make their
victims helpless puppets in the hands of the
outrager. Many crimes and evil actions
have been performed by different people
and were attributed solely to them, when in
reality they were nothing but channels
through which was operating the hidden
mental power of some other individual.
Under no consideration should anyone ever
use that power, even for healing purposes,
nor should one ever let oneself be hypnotized,
even if only for the sake of an experiment.
In every instance, a mental and moral
loss will be the result of it, and even the
operator himself cannot escape the penalty
for violating such fundamental laws. Soon
or late, as a result of the reaction of his own
destructive thoughts and activities, in
accordance with the operation of the mental
laws, he himself will lose all will power,
will have his mental and moral forces almost
entirely obliterated, and will die a physical,
mental and moral wreck. No one should
ever expect to be able to escape such penalty,
274
because there is no compromise with the
laws of Nature.
On the other hand, the scientific mental
treatment, as was stated previously, consists
in affirming Eternal Verities, without any
desire to force them upon one. The mental
laws will take care that a result shall be
obtained. The personal responsibility of
the operator is thrown entirely upon the
laws themselves, and the laws take good
care that everything shall be carried out
properly. That scientific method of mental
treatment is the stimulation of the individual
and his awakening to his true status. The
suggestion method, on thc contrary, thickens
the veil of the individual consciousness,
and paralyzes its activities.
Humanity of today passes through a
great crisis. The development of man's
latent forces, the power of the liberated
thought, bring about fundamental changes
in human nature. The ordinary means by
which the outside world is contacted are
no longer sufficient. New ways are soughtand
found. Until today human beings have
been conscious of only five senses, channels
through which impressions are conveyed to
them or from them. As Humanity is now
approaching the sixth period of its evolution,
called allegorically in the Bible the sixth
day of creation, a new sense, the sixth sense,
is being developed. That new channel
through which impressions are conveyed is
called ''Intuition.'' Intuition is that some275
thing which so often speaks within us, and
seems to tell us what to do, and what not to
do. It is not the voice of our conscience,
which is heard only when we have done
something wrong. It is a "still, small voice,"
called often the voice of God, of Divinity,
but which after all is only our own higher
Self, called the Super-consciousness, of
which our Self-consciousness becomes aware.
Our higher Self knows everything. It is not
limited by Time or Space, and does not need
Reason to aid its mental work. It knows,
because it embraces simultaneously the cause
and the effect, the past, present and future.
Whenever we listen to that small voice of
Intuition, and follow its advice, we obtain
positive results, though sometimes that
voice seems to speak against our own reason.
After all, it is but a seeming contradiction of
our reason, due to the present limitation of
that faculty. In order to develop Intuition,
we must train ourselves to differentiate
between the voice of our own desires, and
that of our Super-consciousness. There
is an easy way to discriminate between the
two. Whenever Intuition speaks to us,
there is felt a peculiar sense of peace and
harmony, though it may happen in a moment
of most disharmonious conditions.
On the other hand, when our desires speak
within us, a sensation of restlessness comes
upon us. Therefore listen to the voice of
peace and wisdom which will lead one into
Harmony, and discard the aggressive clamor
276
of desires, as no good will come out of it.
The more one listens to Intuition, the more
is Intuition developed, and the surer and
wiser become all our actions. Thus human
beings, in developing within themselves
that Divine Ray of Intuition, will manifest
Wisdom, will become six-pointed stars
stars of wisdom, and will bring about the
Dawn of the New Day, the Day of Peace,
of Harmony and of Power.
277
LESSON SIX
1. QUES. What is one of the great problems
of today?
ANS. To educate one's mind to regenerate
itself.
2. QUES. How is it done?
ANS. By raising the vibrations of Mind
to those of Truth and Love.
3. QUES. How did the first mistake originate?
ANS. It originated through Mind, and
through Mind it must be
destroyed.
4. QUES. How does Mind express itselfin our present state of consciousness?
ANS. Through Mental Vibrations, combined
units of which are called
thoughts.
5. QUES. What are Mental Vibrations?
ANS. The first manifestation of Selfconscious
Magnetic Vibrations.
6. QUES. What role does the brain play in
the thinking process?
ANS. It acts as a transmitting station.
7. QUES. What is the Telepathic Appara-
tus?
ANS. It is the Pituitary Body, located
in the front part of our brain,
which sends out into Space Mental
Vibrations, in the form of
thoughts.
8. QUES. Does the Telepathic Apparatusalso receive mental messages?
278
ANS. Yes. It is both a sending and
receiving station.
9. QUES. How does the ordinary thoughtproceed?
ANS. In spheric mental waves emanating
from the Telepathic Apparatus.
10. QUES. Is the ordinary thought percept-
ible at a long distance?
ANS. No, because it becomes too
diluted.
11. QUES. What is thought dust?
ANS. Loose particles of ordinary
thoughts, floating in Space and
surrounding the Earth like a
cloud.
12. QUES. How is the thought made strong
and perceptible at any distance?
ANS. By concentrating it, making it
ONE POINTED.
13. QUES. How is this done?
ANS. Through an effort of will power
the Spheric Mental Vibrations
are focused in one point.
14. QUES. How is a concentrated thoughtsent at a distance?
ANS. By using the Life Energy stored
in the solar plexus to propel that
thought.
15. QUES. What will be the guiding line
which will bring that thought to
its destination?
ANS. Invisible mental lines previously
established by the ordinary
279
thought between the sender and
the receiver.
16. QUES. To what gender does thoughtbelong in general?
ANS. Every thought passing through
the Self-consciousness, which is
of the male gender, assumes that
gender.
17. QUES. Flow many genders are there inMind?
ANS. Two; the. male, represented by
the Self-consciousness, and the
female, represented by the Subconsciousness.
18. QUES. Has every individual the two
genders in their respective minds?
ANS. Yes, without distinction of sex.
19. QUES. What is the first operation of theconcentrated thought sent
through Space?
ANS. It strikes the Telepathic Apparatus
of the receiving individual,
is from there conveyed to the
brain, and the individual becomes
conscious of it.
20. QUES. What is the second operation ofthe same concentrated thought?
ANS. After having contacted the Telepathic
Apparatus, it sinks into
the Sub-consciousness of the
receiving individual.
21. QIJES. What does it do there?
ANS. It grows like an ordinary seed
thrown into the soil.
280
22. QUES. What is the main quality of the
Sub-consciousness?
ANS. It increases and multiplies every
thought seed thrown into it.
23. QUES. Does the Sub-consciousness pos-
sess the power of discrimination?
ANS. No. Being below the Self-con-
scious state, it does not know how
to differentiate between the positive
and the negative, and rears
the wrong as well as the right.
24. QUES. When does the Self-consciousnessbecome aware of the thought
seed thrown in its own Subconsciousness?
ANS. When the thought seed becoming
a thought plant, penetrates into
the Self-consciousness.
25 QUES. Why is it difficult to eradicate a
thought from the Sub-conscious-
ness?
ANS. Because it has rooted itself there.
26. QUES. What is the next operation ofthe concentrated thought?
ANS. It leaves the receiving individual
and proceeds again into Space.
27. QUES. How does it act there?
ANS. Like a torpedo it rushes through
Space, attracting to it loose
particles of thought dust of
corresponding rates of vibration.
28. QUES. Why does it attract those thought
particles?
ANS. Because of the magnetic power
281
of attraction of the Life Energy!
with which the concentrated
thought is charged.
29. QUES. What is the result of thatattraction?
ANS. The concentrated thought grows
bigger and stronger.
30. QUES. How far does it proceed into
Space?
ANS. As far as the Earth's attraction
permits it.
31. QUES. What then happens to thethought?
ANS. Like a boomerang, it returns to
its point of departure.
32. QUES. What laws govern the operationof the thought?
ANS. The same laws acting on the
mental plane which govern physical
bodies on the physical plane.
33. QUES. Does the concentrated thoughtreturn direct to its starting
point?
ANS. If it was sent into Space without
any definite destination, it returns
directly. If it was sent to another
individual, in returning it uses
some individual as a transmitting
station.
34. QUES. Why is a transmitting station
needed in the latter case?
ANS. Because of the law of Polarity.
35. QUES. Why is the concentrated thoughtoften not recognized on its return?
282
ANS. Because it has grown so big.
36. QUES. Is any thought, feeling, or action,
good or evil, ever lost?
ANS. No. It always comes back to its
author, vastly increased.
37. QUES. Is there any possible way to avoidthat coming back?
ANS. No, because it is due to the
operation of the law, and one
reaps what one has sown.
38. QUES. What does that third operationof the concentrated thought explain?
ANS. That saying of Jesus, "With what
measure ye meet it shall be
measured to you again-a measure
full, pressed down, and
RUNNING OVER."
39. QUES. What is the difference betweena creative thought, and simply a
thought?
ANS. The creative thought is charged
to the full with Magnetic Life
Energy. The ordinary thought?
on the contrary, has only a very
limited amount of Life Energy.
40. QUES. What power does the creativethought possess?
ANS. It attracts to us all things which
we may desire.
41. QUES. Can we have all our desires thusrealized?
ANS. Yes, if they are not contrary to
the Universal Laws.
283
42. QUES. Which is the best method of
securing the desired success?
ANS. Make the mental contact with
Universal Life Energy. Make
the desired object real mentally.
Repeat this as often as possible,
and the desired object will come
into one's life through the power
of attraction of the creative
thought.
43. QUES. Is it also necessary to use physicaleffort to bring about the desired
success?
ANS. Yes, because of our present state
of consciousness, which makes it
necessary to translate everything
also into Matter in order to
materialize it in one's life.
44. QUES. When will thought become an
actual direct creation?
ANS. When Lucifer, the fallen Mind,
will be restored to his original
status of Eternal Perfection.
45. QUES. What will that last step be
called?
ANS. The Spiritual State of Consciousness,
Heaven, or the Realm of
Harmony.
46. QUES. What are diseases?
ANS. They are mental parasites, preying
on the Sub-consciousness of
the individual, and manifesting
themselves to him in the form of
ailments.
284
47. QUES. Are those mental parasites negative
through and through?
ANS. No. They are but thin films of
negative vibrations imprisoning
the positive Life Energy within
them.
48. QUES. How can they be destroyed?
ANS. By concentrated positive Mental
Vibrations, which will pierce
them like an arrow.
49. QUES. What is the best way to treatdiseases mentally?
ANS. First, deny the fear of the
disease; next, mentally realize
the positive truth back of that
denial.
50. QUES. How many times should the
denial of a fear be repeated?
ANS. One short denial, with authority
and force, is sufficient.
51. QUES. What positive statements should
be used in order to bring about
the healing?
ANS. All knowledge concerning Man's
eternal and direct relation with
the Absolute, and his perfect
status in the Realm of Eternal
Harmony, should be realized
in treating the patient mentally.
52. QUES. What are the effects of thepositive work of the concentrated
thought?
ANS. It awakens within the patient
the conscious realization of his
285
eternal perfect status and thus
heals him.
53. QUES. Is it necessary to picture mentally
the body of a patient as perfect?
ANS. No. All that is needed is the
realization that the fundamental
vibrations of the body of the
patient, representing the activities
of his soul are basically
harmonious.
54. QUES. Is it necessary, when treatingthe patient mentally, to treat
him also magnetically at the
same time?
ANS. It is advisable, whenever possible,
to combine the two treatments,
for the following reasons: First,
because of the extraordinary
harmonizing effect of the Magnetic
Life Force on both operator
and subject; and secondly, because
the negative is thus
attacked from two sides-from
the outside magnetically, and
from the inside mentally.
55. QUES. What is the best attitude for theoperator to take during mental
healing?
ANS. An attitude of love and compassion.
56. QUES. What is mental chemicalization?
ANS. It is the reaction of the Negative
to the mental influence of the
Positive. The bubble of the
286
Negative inflates to the limit
before bursting.
57. QUES. What is to be done in case ofmental chernicalization?
ANS. Explain to the patient the causes
of it, and persevere in the treatment
to the end.
58. QUES. How long should one treatmentally?
ANS. No definite rule can be given,
the operator must sense within
himself when to stop. As a
general rule, from five to fifteen
minutes is quite sufficient; in
exceptionally acute cases treatments
may last several hours.
59. QUES. Can one treat people mentally
without their special consent for
it?
ANS. No, except, in the following
instances: First when treating
insane people; secondly, when
treating people rendered unconscious;
third, intoxicated people;
fourth, children.
60. QUES. How should children be treated?
ANS. By including the mother also in
the treatment.
61. QUES. Is it advisable to protect one-
self mentally when treating patients,
or when mingling with
different people?
ANS. Yes, in order to prevent the
penetration of undesirable
287
thought seeds into one's subconscious
mind.
62. QUES. How is that protection estab-
lished?
ANS. By building around oneself a
mental wall.
63. QUES. Does mental protection secure
one complete safety?
ANS. No. Only Love Vibrations give
one complete protection, because
they form around an individual
a complete sphere of vibrations
which nothing negative can pierce
through. Love is the only safe
protection we have.
64. QUES. What process is to be used inmental self healing?
ANS. The same method as is used in
healing others, except that instead
of sending the concentrated
thought to another individual, it
is allowed to sink into one s own
Sub-consciousness.
65. QUES. Can magnetic and mental treatments
be combined when treating
a patient at a distance?
ANS. Yes.
66. QUES. What is the method of procedure?
ANS. Create through mental concentration
the image of the patient.
Then treat that image both magnetically
and mentally as if it
were actually the patient himself.
288
67. QUES. Through what means will the
Magnetic and Mental Forces be
conveyed from the image to the
patient himself?
ANS. Through billions of mental lines
connecting the two.
68. QUES. Is it advisable to use audible
mental treatment in such cases?
ANS. Yes.
69. QUES. What is the difference betweenthe scientific method of mental
treatment, and hypnotism, suggestion,
and auto-suggestion?
ANS. The first awakens the individual
to his true, perfect, and eternal
status. The second, third and
fourth, paralyze the expression
of individuality by substituting
new beliefs for old ones.
70. QUES. Are hypnotism, suggestion, andauto-suggestion dangerous?
ANS. Yes, they are one of the most
dangerous and most immoral
abuses of Mental Force.
71. QUES. Should hypnotism, suggestion, or
auto-suggestion be used in therapeutics?
ANS. No, under no consideration.
72. QUES. What is the penalty for the abuse
of the Mental Force?
ANS. The complete loss of it.
73. QUES. What is the sixth sense?
ANS. It is Intuition.
74. QUES. How does Intuition express itself?
289
ANS. Through an inner voice which is
continually speaking to us.
75. QUES. What is the practical value ofIntuition?
ANS. It enables one to sense Truth
independently of the reasoning
powers.
76. QUES. What is the sign by which thevoice of Intuition can he distinguished
from other inner
voices?
ANS. Whenever Intuition speaks to us,
a peculiar sense of peace and
harmony is felt.
77. QUES. How can Intuition he developed?
ANS. By continually listening to its
voice, and co-ordinating our
reason with it.
78. QUES. What are the practical resultsobtained by developing Intuition?
ANS. Man will become six-pointed
that means, perfectly balanced.
79. QUES. What effect would that have onHumanity's Evolution?
ANS. It would bring about the dawn of
the New Day, the Day of Peace,
of Harmony, and of Power.
290
291
292
PIRITUAL Power is obtained
only by those who honestly
and unselfishly live a life
of Activity, Intelligence,
Truth, and Love. As it was
explained in the First Lesson, they are
bound to reach Spirit, the culminate point
of the Life Pyramid, not only because
they want to be Spiritual, but because in
living their daily life according to the Laws
of the Absolute they cannot help reaching
Spirit through the operation of the very
Laws they live.
First a few glimpses of that Spiritual
Power will come to them. They will, during
their silence and in contacting the Universal
293
Life Energy, rise higher and higher until
finally they will reach Spiritual Vibrations,
which are the highest we know of in our
present stake of consciousness. Very often
high mental vibrations are taken for Spiritual
ones, but whoever has experienced Spiritual
Vibrations can never confuse the two. When
mental vibrations rise very high, they become
not only very powerful but also very soothing
and harmonious because of their approach
to the Spiritual Plane. Still they are not
yet Spiritual.
Mental vibrations can come very close to
Perfection, but they cannot yet enter the
Gates of Perfection because of the peculiar
condition in which the human Mind is now.
Mind, Lucifer, is still an exile from Heaven;
he has not the right to return to his Eternal
Home until he has learned the lesson of Love,
has permeated his own quality with the
quality of his Eternal Twin, Love (Christ).
Until our Mind is pervaded with absolute
Love, that Mind will still remain at the
Gates of Heaven and will not enter in. It is
only Love, the Christ element within us,
which can bear us through the Gates of
Heaven into Eternal Harmony. Mind has
to give up its work there and let Inspiration
and Love take us by the hand and lead us
into the Realm of Spirit.
The previous six lessons were gradually
preparing the student for this last Seventh
Lesson. There has been a great deal of
detail in these lessons; but when one comes
294
to the apex, to Spirit, there everything is
simplicity, and because of that wonderful
simplicity, the Seventh Lesson can be
properly received only through Intuition and
Inspiration.
Yet, even in this instance, there is a
certain way of procedure to reach Spiritual
Vibrations, and the theory of it is the
following:
WHEN THE POSITIVE THOUGHT IS
ESTABLISHED AND THE MAGNETIC CUR-
RENT FLOWING, RISE HIGHER AND
HIGHER THROUGH INSPIRATION INTO
THE REALM OP SPIRIT. FORGET PERSON-
ALITY AND KNOW THAT YOU ARE NOTH-
ING BY YOURSELP AND EVERYTHING
WITH GOD, THE FATHER, THE ABSOLUTE,
THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, WHICH CREATES,
CONSTITUTES, GOVERNS, SUSTAINS AND
CONTAINS ALL. TAKE LONG, DEEP, EVEN
BREATHS, AND LET YOUR LAST CON-
SCIOUS THOUGHT BE THE REALIZATION
OF YOUR ONENESS WITH SPIRIT. THERE
WILL COME A MOMENT WHEN SUDDENLY
AN INFLUX OF EXTRAODINARY LIGHT
WILL BE FELT-- A LIVING, CONSCIOUS,
LOVING LIGHT. LIGIIT WITIHN AND LIGHT
WITHOUT. YOU WILL FEEL AS IF MERGED
IN AN OCEAN OF LIGHT AND AT THE
SAME TIME YOU WILL FEEL THAT LIGHT
ALSO WITHIN YOU. THAT IS, YOU WILL
REALIZE YOUR COMPLETE ONENESS WITH
THAT LIGHT. THUS THE SPIRITUAL
VIBRATIONS ARE CONTACTED. YOUR
295
WORK IS DONE – LEAVE THE REST TO
THE GREAT LAW. WHEN YOU WILL FEEL
THOSE SPIPITUAL VIBRATIONS PADING
AWAY, DO NOT TRY TO STOP THEM.
SPIRIT CANNOT BE FORCED. LET THEM
DISAPPEAR NATURALLY.
To establish the positive thought means
to do all the mental work as far as concerns
the realization of Man's perfect status, his
direct and constant relation with the Great
Principle, his Author. There all the knowledge
obtained, especially in the First
Lesson, as well as in the other previous lessons,
must be used. In other words, within
one s mind must be fully realized Man's
Eternal Perfection. Naturally, the contact
with the Universal Life Energy must be
made first, and the Magnetic Current flowing,
during the process of establishing the
positive thought. When that is accomplished
and the realization of Man's Real Self and
his relation to the Absolute is clear in one s
mind, then is the time to rise higher.
Personality must be entirely forgotten, as
well of the patient as of the healer. Mind
has completed its work, and it is to higher
Powers, to Inspiration and Love, to carry
the work further. Through Inspiration
coming from our Super-conscious Self must
we raise our vibrations into the highest;
once started in that direction, our vibrations
will carry us higher and higher, because of
the Law of Evolution which says: "All
vibrations tend naturally to rise upward in
296
the scale of Eternal Harmony." In realizing
that all Power comes from the Father,
from the Absolute, the Great Principle,
Which creates, constitutes, governs, sustains
and contains all, we thus identify ourselves
more and more with that Power. Our last
conscious thought must he to know and to
feel that Oneness with the Absolute. Then
we must let ourselves go entirely and lose
consciousness of all surroundings. Long,
deep, even breaths taken at that time will
help a great deal to increase our emotional
vibrations. And then will come a moment
when suddenly a flood of dazzling Light
bursts upon us. Not mere physical light is
It; It is living; one feels Its pulsations. It is
conscious; It seems to know everything. One
senses how wise It is. And supremely loving
is this Light also. It is like the soft caress of
a mother-Love within, Love without. One
feels as if merged in an ocean of Light, as if
waves of that Light are passing through one
and beating at the shores of one's inner self.
Light within, Light without. A complete
Oneness with that wondrous Power is realized,
and yet one's individuality is not
dissolved, not lost, in all that Power.
At the same time beautiful music,
harmonies of the Spiritual Spheres, are
vibrating about us, and evoking echoes from
within. Wonderful fragrance penetrates one
through and through. Like living waters,
like nectar, the drink of gods, come those
Vibrations to one s sense of taste; and as a
297
lovely breeze, soft yet penetrating to the
very depth of one's being, It expresses Itself
through the sense of touch. It is Ecstasy,
Infinite Bliss, Heaven brought down to
Earth. Thus Spiritual Vibrations are contacted;
man becomes consciously One with
God. There are no adequate words to express
this condition. Once experienced, no one can
ever forget it. Christians call it Ecstasy, the
Touch of Grace. The Hindus call it Samadhi,
Nirvana; the Mohammedans, Paradisic Bliss.
the Seventh Heaven. Whenever Spirit is
contacted in that highest aspect, healing is
instantaneous. Not only healing of physical
ills, but also of mental and moral troubles.
The Ray of Spirit changes entirely the nature
of the individual; like fire, It cleanses and
purifies it, and from a sinner It does make a
saint. When Mary Magdalene, a woman of
the lowest moral standard, bathed with her
tears the feet of the beloved Master, she rose
into the highest, she contacted Spiritual
Vibrations, and from a harlot she became a
sainted woman. When Saul of Tarsus,
persecutor of Christians, on his way to
Damascus, was struck with the Divine Light,
Spiritual Vibrations contacted him and he
was first blinded, but when he recovered
again his sight, from a persecutor of Christ
and his followers, he became St. Paul, one of
His greatest Apostles. Whenever an individual
is touched by Spiritual Vibrations,
by Grace, his whole nature is changed
and he becomes another being. No man
298
can tell who will respond to that highest call.
Many surprises may await those who try
to bring about this contact with the Divine.
Some people, seemingly material through and
through, suddenly are able, through Love
and Inspiration, to rise into the highest; and
some, called spiritual characters, believing
themselves to be such, when Spirit comes to
them, cannot rise to meet the Holiest, and
thus remain shut out from the Greatest there
is. It requires the cooperation of the patient
with the healer, a sincere cooperation, in
order to bring about the highest results. If
the patient is not ready, no matter how hard
the healer may try, he will not be able to lift
him into the Realm of Spirit. Therefore, if
one would have that wonderful experience of
becoming consciously One with the Absolute,
it were better to enter alone into the secret
chamber of one's inner consciousness, and
there try through Inspiration and Love to
reach Spirit. When the Spiritual contact is
made, the hands of the healer, if they rest on
the shoulders or on any other part of the
body of the patient, will be raised unconsciously
and held over the patient in a position
of blessing. The moment we become
One with the Absolute, we are so completely
identified with His Nature that we unconsciously
do what He does throughout
Eternity. "He blesses the Universe which
He has begotten." Therefore, we bless the
World also and the patient who is there
under our care; and through our hands, from
299
all our being, are flowing no longer ordinary
Magnetic or Mental Vibrations, but the
Vibrations of the Spirit Itself, Whose touch
is sacred above all. A condition of such Bliss
could not last for any length of time, because
under the Divine Ray a human body would
be dissolved. Therefore, Spiritual Vibrations
stay with us only as long as we can bear
them, and gradually, like some lovely strain
of music, they begin to fade away. No matter
how much we would like them to remain, we
are not permitted to ask them to tarry longer.
Spirit knows Its own and cannot be governed;
we must let these Spiritual Vibrations fade
away naturally and be thankful to our Father
that we were able to contact Him in His
highest Aspect. Our work is done; we must
leave the rest to the Great Law.
According to Scientific investigations,
Spiritual Vibrations are sent out and received
through a certain physical organ located in
the upper part of the brain behind the
Pituitary Body and called the Pineal Gland.
The continual, conscious rising within our
own selves of our highest emotional vibrations,
stimulates more and more the Pineal
Gland, that organ of our Super-conscious-
ness, which is also the most sensitive organ
in our body. The Pineal Gland then begins
to function with increasing power, and in
that way acts as a physical channel through
which are contacted Spiritual Vibrations, the
highest we know of in our present state of
consciousness.
300
The Super-consciousness is in human beings
the direct Spiritual link between them
and the Absolute. Through it human consciousness
is connected with Cosmic Intelligence.
It is the guardian angel referred to
in different religions, who day and night
beholds the Face of God.
Not always is one successful in contacting
Spiritual Vibrations. Favorable conditions
must combine into a harmonious cooperation
in order to bring about that contact. Nevertheless,
we must always try to reach the
highest, to rise into the Spiritual Realm, and
we must not feel discouraged if we do not
succeed each time. Each trial, each effort in
that direction will bring us closer and closer
to the Source of Spiritual Power. Some day
we will reach that Spiritual Power, will become
One with It; and in that day, all Power
will be ours. It is the Baptism by the Holy
Ghost when that Power illumines one. But
before reaching that very Highest, before
being baptized by the Spirit, one must go
first through the Baptism by Fire, the purification
necessary for a higher initiation.
About two thousand years ago a Voice
Crying in the Wilderness, John, the one who
walked before Christ, to prepare the way,
baptized humanity with water. That means
he cleansed, regenerated their bodies, their
physical, animal natures, to receive properly
the teachings of the Savior of the World.
Today, twenty centuries later, comes to
Humanity the Baptism by Fire; that is, the
301
purification of the human mind through
knowledge aflame with Love. It is a step
higher, it is a preparation for the coming of
One, Who, when lie comes to this Earth
again, will baptize with the Baptism of
Spirit, or the Holy Ghost, those who are
already purified by Fire, by the radiant
Flame of Love. No man will come unto the
Spirit until his body is made clean by water,
and his mind pure by fire. That is, no man
will be liberated from the bonds of ignorance
and fear, and rise into Eternal Freedom, who
has not regenerated his body through Life
Energy (Magnetic Vibrations), and purified
his mind by Truth and Love.
THE TWO ROADS
Great signs are given to Humanity today
as in the days of old, yet with eyes open they
do not see, and with cars open they do not
hear, because their hearts are closed through
the pride of their minds.
Human beings have two Roads to walk
upon. One is the Human Road; the nature of
the other road is Divine; and happiness is the
goal of both.
Those who decide to walk the Human
Road must always look about for help and
assistance from their fellow beings. They bow
before the powers of this world, they flatter
them, they compromise with their own hearts
because they think the end can justify the
302
means. And for a time success is theirs. Yet
the more they scheme, the more difficult it
becomes to keep in harmony with all; still,
they advance because support was promised
them by word of mouth by many mighty of
this world. At last they reach their goal.
With hands extended, ready to grasp it, they
say it is their own, when suddenly, beneath
their feet the very ground is shattered to
pieces and they fall, their goal not achieved!
Why such disaster, such terrible deception?
Why all this loss of energy, of time, of hope?
Because their ignorance made them rely
upon that which is the most unreliable thing
on earth upon human beings.
And there are those who walk the Divine
Road. No human help do they expect. At
first their steps are handicapped. They have
to fight ill-will, and apathy, and ignorance,
and fear. From time to time some promises
by humans are made to them to help them in
their work. With gratitude they thank, yet
do not build on these, as they rely alone on
Laws and Divine Help. They know that
human beings, those even of the best, are
human still, hence limited in every way, and
therefore do they trust themselves to God
alone. They know that limitations can never
prevent All Power from expressing Itself
through endless means. They know that if
one human promise wanes, that if one human
friend will fail, there are ten more through
which the Great Law manifests Itself. And
if those ten should also fail, there are many
303
others, countless channels, through which all
good will come to them who walk the Divine
Road. And by and by, slowly, step after
step they climb, overcoming obstacles along
the way, until easier and broader turns the
path on which they move onward. Strength
and joy increase continually; there the goal is
in sight, within their reach. They raise their
hands and take their own. No man can steal
away that prize of theirs, because it is their
own by right.
Those are the two Roads which lie before
each man on Earth; let every human being
pause and ponder well which path is best to
take.
One last question, a great question, lies
still open for those who wish to know. Why
is there Evil in this World? If God is God,
why does He tolerate all sin, sorrow, suffering,
to be spread broadcast upon this Earth?
Why should Man, if son of God, the same in
essence as the Spirit, the Great All, why
should he need to toil, to strive, to suffer?
Old as the World is this question. Most
difficult to answer. No direct message could
reach us through all these labyrinths of the
human mind; therefore from above, through
Inspiration, veiled in a legend, must come to
suffering Humanity the answer. That an-
swer-closing chapter of this book of Science
of Eternal Being-is called "The Dream."
304
THE DREAM
Night! The fragrance of a warm summer
night suffuses all Nature. The firmament
studded with stars glowing like diamonds, a
net of glistening loveliness, through which
the dark beauty of night is fading.
Soft, living Light invades the clear atmosphere
like golden vapor. It increases
steadily, penetrating and covering everything.
Bathed in its radiance, there appear
glittering diamond peaks, mountains of topaz
and amethyst, massive rocks of emerald,
gigantic monoliths of sapphire, as steps leading
to higher regions. The Light grows in
strength, investing all things with color and
warmth. These are no rays of a sun rising
from behind the hills, but a glowing radiance
emanating from everywhere, embracing
everything, and increasing like some strain
of music: and indeed, there is music in the
air. Gentle melodies are trembling, soft
harmonies are vibrating, and mysterious
echoes answer them.
Set amidst these precious mountains,
surrounded by a grove of gigantic trees so
lofty that they appear to be talking with the
clouds, stands a Palace, large as a city and of
wondrous beauty. The walls of it are streams
of Light rising from the ground and playing
in all the colors of the rainbow. Its flat
roofs, towers and domes are golden clouds
upon which the glow of the spreading Light
is shedding its morning splendor.
And still the Light grows in strength.
305
Through the golden roof of the Palace rises
an innumerable procession of Beings, each
one seeming more wonderful than the other.
Of almost similar height and size are they,
but how different each one! Some are like
fiery lava streaming from the crater of a
volcano; some are like moonrays made living
beings; some like roaring waterfalls with
rainbows playing about their heads; some
like precious stones become alive. Their wonderful
bodies appear in all their unhidden glory:
no covering conceals their Eternal beauty.
And eyes, such as when the Spirit Itself looks
on the World It has created, full of supreme
majesty and power, full of Infinite Love, are
shining from under their divine brows!
Two of these Beings rise with the rest
from the depths of the Palace, and like twin
stars stand tenderly embraced on the top of
the highest tower. More radiant, more
wonderful than the others are they. Like a
brilliant star is the countenance of one. His
body, taller and stronger than that of his
Mate, is like a phosphorescent opal. Streams
of living Light are flowing through his body
and making it shine in iridescent hues. His
eyes are lightning; a purple cloud his hair;
and when he speaks and when he moves, far
away thunder Is heard.............Golden
and shining is his Companion, his body
woven of sun-rays, his hair a glowing flame,
his eyes reflecting the glory of Heaven itself;
and when he speaks and when he moves, soft
harmonies fill the air.
306
With gestures of adoration they raise their
arms in triumphant song---greeting to the
Spirit, thanks to the Great Giver. Their
brothers follow them in the song; all Nature
joins in this hymn of gratitude. Birds and
animals, trees and flowers, rocks and clouds,
waters and the ground itself, sing the eternal
praise of all beings to The One Supreme
Being, their Divine Father. Stronger and
more wondrous grows the great song, flooding
the Universe with praise and love; it rises
to a thunder of triumph, and dies away in
silence.
Silence! A limpid breeze moves the air,
and each one feels within himself the words,
"Live and Love." The Great Spirit, The
Father, is communing with His children.
Infinite bliss fills every being, and pervades
the Universe. The Day of Heaven has
begun.
But the triumphant band passes out of
sight; the roofs are deserted; and the two,
the Heavenly Twins, sink back into the
Palace. And there they stand within the
great tower in the very midst of it. High,
circular walls surround them, but there are
no openings in those walls. Deep and mysterious
is the material out of which they are
built; precious also is it, for its name is
Silence. And upon those mighty walls of
Silence, towering high up into the free air,
are set lofty pillars. Precious also is the material
from which they are made, shining in
all the colors of the rainbow; their name is
307
Hope. And through these pillars of Hope
stretching their slender shafts into the highest
air, are sailing golden clouds. Silent they
move through the tower of Silence; but the
birds with the rustling of their wings, do not
dare to fly through because of the sacred
Silence.
A Upon these pillars of Hope rests a glorious
dome, effulgent as a sun, and Joy is the
material out of which the dome is made. And
the floor upon which they stand is a transparent
crystal, a gigantic lens, and through
that lens the whole Universe appears stretched
out at their feet. Worlds without number,
all stars, sun-systems, chains of planets, all
beings, every thing, the greatest and the
smallest, can be seen through that crystal.
Understanding is the material out of which
that floor is made. With their feet firmly
established on Understanding, with Silence
surrounding them, with Hope towering over
them and with Joy crowning them, stand the
two, keeping watch over the World.
And the one whose voice is like thunder
speaks to his Mate.
Oh! Thou loved One! Thou, radiant Joy
of the World! Once more we stand ready to
fulfil our charge, to carry out our duties in
the eternal scheme-Thou the Love of the
World, I the Mind of it. All knowledge, all
power are ours. Why then must we every
morning adore, greet as our Master, One
Whom none has ever seen? Thou art from
Eternity, and I am from Eternity, and so are
308
all our brothers. Yet who has ever seen the
One Who claims to be our Father and Who is
called God? True it is that every morning a
Voice speaks within us-but there is none can
tell whether it comes not from our very
selves. Why should we adore any longer
One Who remains a mystery to us? Enough
that we should be slaves to an unknown
master. Let us free ourselves from the bonds
by which we are now bound. All powers, all
forces are ours; therefore let us rule the
World-we two, the greatest powers of this
World."
The answer came soft-winged, tender as
Love itself.
"Ah! Brother, Why these words of
pride, of revolt? Thou knowest-for thy
heart tells thee in spite of all-that there is a
God, that we have an invisible Father,
Who is also our loving Mother, and Who
enfolds us, His children, in His Divine
embrace. He thinks continually of us.
He plans ceaselessly for our joy. For us He
pours out into manifestation the endless
beauties, the transplendent wonders, from
the unmanifest regions of His Heart. And
He asks nothing from us but our love. Is it
so difficult to love Him Who so loves us?
Dismiss these thoughts of rebellion, forget
these proud words. Sorrow alone can come
from them, my Brother."
Like sudden thunder, like the bursting
of crashing floods, came the roaring, shattering
outcry.
309
"What is this Hidden Power that can
compel Mind? Mind, the glittering luminary
of all the Worlds, is regent in the
Universe. No servant's place shall I be satisfied
to take. But if thou, oh my gentle Brother!
wilt not rule with me, and share my power,
then alone shall I command the World."
And with these words, swift as a streak
of lightning, he rises from the ground of
Understanding, through Silence, through
Hope, through radiant Joy, into the open.
Higher and still more high, past the precious
mountains, he climbs the lambent air, leaving
behind a blazing train of phosphorus,
until his feet touch the summit of the most
aspiring peak, the pinnacle of glittering
diamond. Poised on the shining spire, his
cry goes out to all the World.
"Spirits of Light! Sons of Eternity! The
day of freedom, of liberation, has come
to us! Free are ye born, free shall ye live!
No more adoration, no more praying to a
Master, to a God Whom none has ever seen.
From now, ye shall be your own masters.
Come all, come all to me, and ye shall be
free!"
And from the hidden parts of all the
World, myriads of Spirits, Sons of Light, are
gathering together. They surround the
diamond peak where stands the one whose
eyes are lightning, whose countenance is
like a blazing star. With words of adoration
they shout:
"Hail to thee, Lucifer! Son of the Morn310
ing! Hail to thee, Liberator! Our Leader,
our Master, our God!"
And he who is proclaimed the master of
the how, called the ruler of the World,
looks down upon those prostrate at his feet.
"I am your master, I am your god!
Follow me, for I alone can give you freedom;
new beauties shall ye discover through me,
new powers and forces shall ye wield. Ye
shall become more piercingly brilliant than
ever ye have been, like flaming diamonds,
more scintillating than the blazing suns.
But in the sacred grove, hidden amid the
giant trees, with sad eyes and a heavy heart,
stands one whose name is Love, words of
prayer falling from his lips.
"Father, Beloved One! Beating Heart
of all the Universe! Forgive them, for they
know not what they do. Him they call
God, Lucifer they acknowledge as supreme.
Yet he is nothing but Thy child, and all his
powers and beauties he has from Thee.
True it is he appears supreme, for his feet
touch the ground, his head reaches Heaven,
and his glory seems to fill all Space, yet they
are as deceived as he is himself. It is Thy
glory which is still shining through him, and
Thy power is taken for his own. Father,
forgive them, for they know not what they
do. Forgive my Brother, Lucifer, for he is
still the dearest to my heart: he also knows
not what he does!"
From his piercing height, Lucifer heard
the faithful, praying voice-and smiled on
311
him in contempt. But suddenly another
Voice, heavy with destiny, gathering in its
might the Unmeasured Energy of all the
Worlds:
"Lucifer! In Heaven all desires are
achievement. Thou wouldst be free-thou
shalt be free. Go thou, and all those who
worship thee, to that further plane to which
ye all belong. These Regions of Eternal
Light can bear thee no longer. Your bodies
cast shadows in the pure skies. Prom the
Spheres of Light to the outer, utmost voidgo!'
Thus the Voice from the Vaulted Silence:
and on the moment, a sudden burden as of
great heaviness falls on Lucifer and his
followers. They are no longer able to offer
resistance against its weight, and with a
blast of thunder and terror, they fall from
the Realms of Light into the somber void.
As they fall darkness grows denser about
them, until no spark of Light, no hope is
left to them. Par in the utter gloom, still
falling, they perceive a fiery region which
draws them swiftly to it with irresistible
force. And they are cast into an ocean of
fire, of smoke, of molten metal, of boiling
stone.
He who was the first to fall, is also the
first to rise again. And he sees his brothers,
his followers, once Spirits of Light, darkened,
disgraced, extinguished, thrown into that
abode of fire and suffering. And he calls to
them:
312
"Rise, my brothers! Rise, ye who are
still the Sons of Light! True it is that from
the highest Spheres of Bliss, we have been
cast into this desolation. Yet all knowledge
is still mine, and thus all power, and I shall
make for you from this hell a new Heaven,
and this new Heaven shall be called Earth."
As he speaks the ages pass, the flaming
fields contract, the incandescence blazes
with a fainter heat, the fumes and vapors
gradually disperse, and a lustrous, glowing
planet, cradled in fire and beauty, is born.
The lovely Earth appears---green hills and
gentle slopes and flowery meadows, singing
brooks, clear rivers and the blue sea,
mountains and chasms and waterfalls.
And through enchanted forests birds of a
hundred colors are flying, and in the fields
animals are roaming. And Lucifer is pleased
with his creation and says:
"And now, my Brothers! Ye shall be the
inhabitants of this new Heaven and ye shall
be called human beings."
And wonderful beings, lofty of stature,
strong and comely, appear on the Earth:
they propagate and multiply, and rule the
Earth. And Lucifer is their king, their
god.
So fair a world seemed a true semblance
of Heaven. But the canker of revolt which
had cast them from Heaven, still lived with
them. And the spirit of jealousy, hatred,
and pride begins to manifest itself, and
grows, and spreads, until the splendid
313
Earth becomes again a hell. But now they
are unable to bear any longer the suffering
which infests the Earth, and they .find no
help or relief from Lucifer. In their deep
despair, they remember their Father, and
turn to Him and pray again to God. And
God, their Father, hears the cry of His
children, and from His Heart sends down to
them His Own Love. And Love comes down
from Heaven to Earth, and Love becomes
a human being; and Love lives with human
beings and teaches human beings how to
love.
But Lucifer, incarnate also as a human.
being, sees the menace to his power, and in
a passion of hate and jealousy rises against
his Brother and slays his Brother. And
God's Love shakes off the burden of the
Earth, and Earth is without Love again.
So sorrow and terror once more prevail, and
the suffering becomes intolerable. Again
human beings cry out to God for help.
And God, the Father, the loving Mother,
hears the cry of His children, and from His
Heart sends down to them His Own Love.
And Love comes down from Heaven to Earth
again and Love becomes a human being;
and Love lives with human beings, and
teaches them the Law of Love.
But Lucifer, the World's Mind, again
incarnate as a human being, rises against
his Mate, his Eternal Twin, and causes Him
to die, for he sees in Him the great menace
to his power. And once again, God's Love
314
returns to the Father, and again the earth is
void of Love.
So through the ages, whenever misery
and suffering increase upon the Earth so as
to make life intolerable, the children of the
Earth call out for a Deliverer. And always
Love, gentle and tender-hearted; comes to
their call and tries to save His brothers.
But Lucifer ever rises against Him, kills His
body, and destroys His work, for Love is the
continual menace to his power.
And when for the last time, God's Love
came down, to Earth, and lived the humble
life of a simple mortal, giving to Humanity
the greatest lesson that Love ever gave,
Lucifer, incarnate as a human being, rose
once more against his Brother, betrayed Him
and brought Him to His death upon the
cross. But He, of Whom the World was not
worthy, breathing His last breath, dying as
a felon upon the accursed tree, prayed for
those who had crucified Him:
"Father, forgive them, for they know not
what they do. Father, forgive my brother
Lucifer, for he knows not what he does."
These burning words of love struck
Lucifer like lightning in his heart, and he
went out and made an end to his human self.
And rising as a spirit, he beheld the greatness
of his brother's Love, and the endless
evil of his own age-old sin. He saw the
sorrow and the suffering which came through
him to all beings; and he felt that cold and
stony heart of his melt and soften, and he
315
wept tears of blood, tears of fire. And those
tears fell on the Earth and the Earth trembled
to its very foundation.
Thus for the first time, after countless
ages of revolt, did Lucifer lift up his eyes to
God, and words of prayer fell from his lips:
"Father! I know the immensity of my
sin, and do not beg for forgiveness for
myself. For crimes like mine cannot be
atoned. But oh! my Father, forgive them,
those who followed me in my fall. Forgive
them, for they knew not what they did.
No fault was theirs but that they loved me
more than Thee, and listened to the magic of
my words, the glitter of my Mind, so that
Thy Laws were all forgotten. Therefore, I
pray Thee, forgive them and take them back
to Thee: let them return to those pure
Spheres of Light, where Bliss and Harmony
and Serenity are. But for myself, if by my
eternal damnation I can win their eternal
salvation, I am ready to be damned for
Eternity."
'Then from the Vaulted Silence, a Voice,
gathering in its might the Unmeasured
Energy of all the Worlds:
"Lucifer, thy sacrifice is accepted-and
through thy sacrifice shall the World be
saved."
And he, the proud one who had thought
himself a god, bent his knees, and with his
head touched the dust of the ground.
Like far-off thunder sounded his words:
"Father, I thank Thee!"
316
And once again the Voice:
"Lucifer, thou hast sinned much, but
thou hast also loved much. Infinite is thy
sin, but infinite also is thy sacrifice; therefore,
art thou forgiven. Go into the World,
live among the children of the World, and
carry to them the Light of Knowledge purified
by Love. Thus the veils of self-delusion
will be withdrawn one by one, limitations
will be removed, suffering conquered, sorrow
transmuted into Joy. And when the last
human fault shall have been destroyed,
when all thy brothers will have come hack to
Me, then only will come thy day of liberation.
Thy pinions of inspiration, singed by
the fires of hell, will have grown again
strong enough to lift thee from this Earth and
to bear thee back to Heaven. And there, at
the burnished Gates of Heaven, the Portals
of Eternal Harmony, shall Love, thy
Brother, thine Eternal Mate, be waiting for
thee, to lead thee back to Me!"
And Lucifer went into the World. And
Lucifer taught the World. And to the World
Lucifer carried the Light of Pure Knowledge,
glowing with the flame of Love.
Night! The fragrance of a warm summer
night pervades all things. The firmament
blazing with stars, and beyond the stars
darkness softly fading away. The radiant
Palace, the sacred grove, and above them,
the mountains of precious stones. And in
the sacred grove whose trees are talking with
317
the clouds, rest in sleep myriads of Beings of
Eternal Light. Beneath the loftiest tree,
the loftiest king of all the woods, lies one
whose countenance is as a God's. He lies
in deep slumber; and bending over him,
calling him softly with words of Love,
stands his Mate, his Twin.
"Brother! Loved one, awake! Arise, my
Lucifer! The night is fading fast, and
soon the Day of Heaven will begin. Now
must we sing again the praises to our
Father, and lift our voices in adoration and
gratitude to God."
Like far-off thunder came the questioning
words from trembling lips, and out of
sorrowful eyes a flash of lightning: "Oh!
Where am I?"
And the answer: "Thou art in Heaven,
Lucifer."
But again the question: "Where have I
been these ages? This fall, this suffering
through countless years; and always fighting
thee, my loved one, destroying thy work and
killing thee. Where have I been?"
"Not for a single moment of time hast
thou left Heaven, Lucifer. But with thy
brothers in the sacred grove, beneath the
great trees, hast thou slept the night,
instead of with me in the Palace. Lonely
was I, my Brother, for I missed thy presence.
"But these sorrows, these nights of darkness
that I saw and lived? This suffering,
these crimes, this agony? What were they
318
all-whence came they and where have they
gone?"
And the answer-burning words of Love
"Beloved! It was nothing but a Dream."
319
LESSON SEVEN
1. QUES. What is the most direct and
simple way to obtain Spiritual
Power?
ANS. By performing one's ordinary
daily actions ENERGETICALLY,
INTELLIGENTLY,ACCURATELY,
and JOYFULLY.
2. QUES. Can Mental Vibrations be raisedinto Spiritual ones?
ANS. Not until Mind has learned the
lesson of Truth and Love.
3. QUES. What is the theory of how toreach Spiritual Vibrations?
ANS. To become one with Spirit, one
must forget personality, and
through Inspiration and Love
realize the Allness of the Great
Principle and one's oneness with
It.
4. QUES. How are Spiritual Vibrationsperceived?
ANS. Through all the senses, which
become so acute that they are
able to register the highest
vibrations.
5. QIJES. Is It advisable to deny senses inorder to perceive Spiritual Vibrations?
ANS. Denial of senses will not help;
their refinement is needed.
6. QUES. Through which physical' channel
are Spiritual Vibrations most
easily contacted?
320
ANS. Through the Pineal Gland, located
almost in the center of the
upper part of the brain, behind
the Pituitary Body.
7. QUES. What part of our mental self
does the Pineal Gland represent?
ANS. It represents the Super-conscious-
ness, of which it is the organ.
8. QUES. What effect do Spiritual Vibra-
tions have on human beings?
ANS. They entirely change human
nature from negative into positive.
9. QUES. What is that change called?
ANS. The Touch of Grace, Samadhi,
Nirvana, Paradisic Bliss.
10. QUES. Can physical diseases also be
healed by Spiritual Vibrations?
ANS. Yes, and instantaneously.
11. QUES. How long can Spiritual Vibrationsbe contacted?
ANS. As long as human beings can
stand them. Too long a contact
with them would completely dissolve
the material body.
12. QUES. Is one always successful in con-
tacting Spiritual Vibrations?
ANS. No. Favorable conditions must
combine in harmonious co-opera-
tion in order to bring about that
contact.
13. QUES. What is the Baptism by the
Holy Ghost?
ANS. It is the illumination through
321
Spiritual Power, the contact with
Spiritual Vibrations.
14. QUES. What must precede that highest
baptism?
ANS. The Baptism by Fire.
15. QUES. What is the Baptism by Fire?
ANS. It is the purification of the human
mind through knowledge aflame
with Love.
16. QUES. When will that Baptism come to
Humanity?
ANS. It has already come to Humanity,
and is baptising it with its
radiant flame.
17. QUES. What preceded the Baptism by
Fire?
ANS. The Baptism by Water, which
purifies the body.
18. QUES. What does the Baptism by Water
stand for?
ANS. For the regeneration of the body
through the use of the Magnetic
Life Force.
19. QUES. Can anyone reach the Baptismby Spirit, which means the
purification of the soul, without
first having the mind purified
through the Baptism by Fire, and
the body, through the Baptism by
Water.
ANS. No.
20. QUES. What do the three kinds of vibra-
tions, the Magnetic, the Mental,
and the Spiritual, stand for?
322
ANS. They stand for the three-fold
Baptism means the regeneration
of human beings on the
Three Planes.
21. QUET. What are the two Roads human
beings walk upon in their life?
ANS. The Human Road, and the
Divine Road.
22. QUES. What is the difference betweenthem?
ANS. The Human Road, relying upon
human support, leads to failure.
The Divine Road, based cxelusively
upon the Great Principle
and its universal Forces and
Laws, leads to success.
23. QUES. What is the most unreliable thing
on Earth?
ANS. A human being.
24. QUES. What is the one power on whichto rely completely?
ANS. The Power of the Absolute, called
also the Great Principle, or God.
25. QUES. What is the origin of Evil?
ANS. The belief in separation from All
Power.
26. QUES. Did that separation ever actuallytake place?
ANS. No. It is nothing but a dream
which Humanity is dreaming.
27. QUES. What does the legend "TheDream" represent?
ANS. It represents the tragic History
of Mind
323
28. QUES. Who are the two principal charac-
ters of that Legend?
ANS. Two Brothers, heavenly Twins,
Lucifer and Christ.
29. QUES. What do they stand for?
ANS. For Mind and Love respectively.
30. QUES. Where does the action take place?
ANS. in the realm of Eternal Harmony,
commonly called Heaven.
31. QUES. Explain briefly the legend.
ANS. In the secrecy of Silence, Lucifer
and Christ are performing their
eternal duties of keeping watch
over the World. Being the first
dual manifestation of the Great
Principle, they are, as Mind and
Love, the two greatest powers of
this World. Mind, feeling himself
to be the possessor of all
knowledge and power, refuses to
acknowledge the Source of All
Power, his own Father, the
Eternally Unmanifest, called God,
and claims that power as his own.
He offers to share the power of
this World with his twin brother,
Love. Christ refuses to give up
His God, and warns Lucifer of
the great danger of pride. Lucifer,
or Mind, then decides to
rule the World alone, and to substitute
his power for that of God.
lie sends his call throughout the
World, lie beguiles those fellow
324
spirits who respond to his call
with wonderful promises if they
will follow his lead, and they
proclaim him their liberator and
their god. Having broken away
from All Power, Lucifer (Mind),
loses the greater part of his
power, and falls from his high
estate, together with those who
followcd him. This fall is called
the Involution into Matter, which
is itself nothing but the product
of the involutionary process.
Though fallen, Lucifer's pride is
still unbroken, and with the
remnant of his knowledge and
power, he tries to create out of
the Hell into which they have
been precipitated, out of the
boiling, fiery mass of pride,
revolt, jealousy and hatred, a
new heaven which he calls Earth,
and he makes human beings out
of his fellow spirits. Mind, In
his utter pride, wants to create
his own world after the divine
pattern. Seemingly successful in
the beginning, he ultimately fails
completely. Pride, revolt, jealously,
hatred, all permeating his
creation, make again a Hell out of
the heaven which he thought he
had created. His twin brother,
Love, comes to the rescue, but
325
Mind, out of' jealousy, continually
fights the only one who could
help him. Through ages that
fight goes on, until Love wins,
and Mind (Lucifer) acknowledges
his defeat. There comes to him
the realization of the immensity
of his mistake, and he decides
to face eternal damnation in
order to save Humanity. His
sacrifice is accepted, but through
his own sacrifice the negative in
him is destroyed, and the positive
and eternal is brought out. He
goes out into the World to learn
the lesson of Love, and his
mission as Mind is to teach
Humanity that All Power comes
from God alone. Thus he brings
back all human beings to the
Realm of Eternal Harmony,
called Heaven, and redeems himself
also. And when that work
has been completed, though seemingly
it lasts through countless
ages, and is so real to him, he
realizes that all that negative and
sad experience was nothing but a
dream.
326
Having learned the lesson of Love, Mind
becomes one with it, in the Bosom of their
Eternal Father, God.
Every human being horn to this Earth
is experiencing within himself that living
dream of Mind. Mind is continually fighting
against Love, the Luciferian principle combatting
the Christ Principle, and when the
Christ Principle, Love wins, then Lucifer,
the fallen Mind, is redeemed and the
liberated individual is awakened to his true
status of Eternal Perfection as a Son of God.
327
328